@aws-sdk/client-mediaconvert 3.687.0 → 3.692.0
This diff represents the content of publicly available package versions that have been released to one of the supported registries. The information contained in this diff is provided for informational purposes only and reflects changes between package versions as they appear in their respective public registries.
- package/dist-types/models/models_0.d.ts +623 -623
- package/dist-types/models/models_1.d.ts +573 -573
- package/dist-types/models/models_2.d.ts +128 -128
- package/dist-types/ts3.4/models/models_0.d.ts +644 -622
- package/dist-types/ts3.4/models/models_1.d.ts +579 -571
- package/dist-types/ts3.4/models/models_2.d.ts +128 -128
- package/package.json +35 -35
|
@@ -19,17 +19,17 @@ export interface AllowedRenditionSize {
|
|
|
19
19
|
* Use Height to define the video resolution height, in pixels, for this rule.
|
|
20
20
|
* @public
|
|
21
21
|
*/
|
|
22
|
-
Height?: number;
|
|
22
|
+
Height?: number | undefined;
|
|
23
23
|
/**
|
|
24
24
|
* Set to ENABLED to force a rendition to be included.
|
|
25
25
|
* @public
|
|
26
26
|
*/
|
|
27
|
-
Required?: RequiredFlag;
|
|
27
|
+
Required?: RequiredFlag | undefined;
|
|
28
28
|
/**
|
|
29
29
|
* Use Width to define the video resolution width, in pixels, for this rule.
|
|
30
30
|
* @public
|
|
31
31
|
*/
|
|
32
|
-
Width?: number;
|
|
32
|
+
Width?: number | undefined;
|
|
33
33
|
}
|
|
34
34
|
/**
|
|
35
35
|
* @public
|
|
@@ -78,12 +78,12 @@ export interface AudioChannelTaggingSettings {
|
|
|
78
78
|
* Specify the QuickTime audio channel layout tags for the audio channels in this audio track. Enter channel layout tags in the same order as your output's audio channel order. For example, if your output audio track has a left and a right channel, enter Left (L) for the first channel and Right (R) for the second. If your output has multiple single-channel audio tracks, enter a single channel layout tag for each track.
|
|
79
79
|
* @public
|
|
80
80
|
*/
|
|
81
|
-
ChannelTag?: AudioChannelTag;
|
|
81
|
+
ChannelTag?: AudioChannelTag | undefined;
|
|
82
82
|
/**
|
|
83
83
|
* Specify the QuickTime audio channel layout tags for the audio channels in this audio track. Enter channel layout tags in the same order as your output's audio channel order. For example, if your output audio track has a left and a right channel, enter Left (L) for the first channel and Right (R) for the second. If your output has multiple single-channel audio tracks, enter a single channel layout tag for each track.
|
|
84
84
|
* @public
|
|
85
85
|
*/
|
|
86
|
-
ChannelTags?: AudioChannelTag[];
|
|
86
|
+
ChannelTags?: AudioChannelTag[] | undefined;
|
|
87
87
|
}
|
|
88
88
|
/**
|
|
89
89
|
* @public
|
|
@@ -144,37 +144,37 @@ export interface AudioNormalizationSettings {
|
|
|
144
144
|
* Choose one of the following audio normalization algorithms: ITU-R BS.1770-1: Ungated loudness. A measurement of ungated average loudness for an entire piece of content, suitable for measurement of short-form content under ATSC recommendation A/85. Supports up to 5.1 audio channels. ITU-R BS.1770-2: Gated loudness. A measurement of gated average loudness compliant with the requirements of EBU-R128. Supports up to 5.1 audio channels. ITU-R BS.1770-3: Modified peak. The same loudness measurement algorithm as 1770-2, with an updated true peak measurement. ITU-R BS.1770-4: Higher channel count. Allows for more audio channels than the other algorithms, including configurations such as 7.1.
|
|
145
145
|
* @public
|
|
146
146
|
*/
|
|
147
|
-
Algorithm?: AudioNormalizationAlgorithm;
|
|
147
|
+
Algorithm?: AudioNormalizationAlgorithm | undefined;
|
|
148
148
|
/**
|
|
149
149
|
* When enabled the output audio is corrected using the chosen algorithm. If disabled, the audio will be measured but not adjusted.
|
|
150
150
|
* @public
|
|
151
151
|
*/
|
|
152
|
-
AlgorithmControl?: AudioNormalizationAlgorithmControl;
|
|
152
|
+
AlgorithmControl?: AudioNormalizationAlgorithmControl | undefined;
|
|
153
153
|
/**
|
|
154
154
|
* Content measuring above this level will be corrected to the target level. Content measuring below this level will not be corrected.
|
|
155
155
|
* @public
|
|
156
156
|
*/
|
|
157
|
-
CorrectionGateLevel?: number;
|
|
157
|
+
CorrectionGateLevel?: number | undefined;
|
|
158
158
|
/**
|
|
159
159
|
* If set to LOG, log each output's audio track loudness to a CSV file.
|
|
160
160
|
* @public
|
|
161
161
|
*/
|
|
162
|
-
LoudnessLogging?: AudioNormalizationLoudnessLogging;
|
|
162
|
+
LoudnessLogging?: AudioNormalizationLoudnessLogging | undefined;
|
|
163
163
|
/**
|
|
164
164
|
* If set to TRUE_PEAK, calculate and log the TruePeak for each output's audio track loudness.
|
|
165
165
|
* @public
|
|
166
166
|
*/
|
|
167
|
-
PeakCalculation?: AudioNormalizationPeakCalculation;
|
|
167
|
+
PeakCalculation?: AudioNormalizationPeakCalculation | undefined;
|
|
168
168
|
/**
|
|
169
169
|
* When you use Audio normalization, optionally use this setting to specify a target loudness. If you don't specify a value here, the encoder chooses a value for you, based on the algorithm that you choose for Algorithm. If you choose algorithm 1770-1, the encoder will choose -24 LKFS; otherwise, the encoder will choose -23 LKFS.
|
|
170
170
|
* @public
|
|
171
171
|
*/
|
|
172
|
-
TargetLkfs?: number;
|
|
172
|
+
TargetLkfs?: number | undefined;
|
|
173
173
|
/**
|
|
174
174
|
* Specify the True-peak limiter threshold in decibels relative to full scale (dBFS). The peak inter-audio sample loudness in your output will be limited to the value that you specify, without affecting the overall target LKFS. Enter a value from 0 to -8. Leave blank to use the default value 0.
|
|
175
175
|
* @public
|
|
176
176
|
*/
|
|
177
|
-
TruePeakLimiterThreshold?: number;
|
|
177
|
+
TruePeakLimiterThreshold?: number | undefined;
|
|
178
178
|
}
|
|
179
179
|
/**
|
|
180
180
|
* @public
|
|
@@ -287,47 +287,47 @@ export interface AacSettings {
|
|
|
287
287
|
* Choose BROADCASTER_MIXED_AD when the input contains pre-mixed main audio + audio description (AD) as a stereo pair. The value for AudioType will be set to 3, which signals to downstream systems that this stream contains "broadcaster mixed AD". Note that the input received by the encoder must contain pre-mixed audio; the encoder does not perform the mixing. When you choose BROADCASTER_MIXED_AD, the encoder ignores any values you provide in AudioType and FollowInputAudioType. Choose NORMAL when the input does not contain pre-mixed audio + audio description (AD). In this case, the encoder will use any values you provide for AudioType and FollowInputAudioType.
|
|
288
288
|
* @public
|
|
289
289
|
*/
|
|
290
|
-
AudioDescriptionBroadcasterMix?: AacAudioDescriptionBroadcasterMix;
|
|
290
|
+
AudioDescriptionBroadcasterMix?: AacAudioDescriptionBroadcasterMix | undefined;
|
|
291
291
|
/**
|
|
292
292
|
* Specify the average bitrate in bits per second. The set of valid values for this setting is: 6000, 8000, 10000, 12000, 14000, 16000, 20000, 24000, 28000, 32000, 40000, 48000, 56000, 64000, 80000, 96000, 112000, 128000, 160000, 192000, 224000, 256000, 288000, 320000, 384000, 448000, 512000, 576000, 640000, 768000, 896000, 1024000. The value you set is also constrained by the values that you choose for Profile, Bitrate control mode, and Sample rate. Default values depend on Bitrate control mode and Profile.
|
|
293
293
|
* @public
|
|
294
294
|
*/
|
|
295
|
-
Bitrate?: number;
|
|
295
|
+
Bitrate?: number | undefined;
|
|
296
296
|
/**
|
|
297
297
|
* Specify the AAC profile. For the widest player compatibility and where higher bitrates are acceptable: Keep the default profile, LC (AAC-LC) For improved audio performance at lower bitrates: Choose HEV1 or HEV2. HEV1 (AAC-HE v1) adds spectral band replication to improve speech audio at low bitrates. HEV2 (AAC-HE v2) adds parametric stereo, which optimizes for encoding stereo audio at very low bitrates.
|
|
298
298
|
* @public
|
|
299
299
|
*/
|
|
300
|
-
CodecProfile?: AacCodecProfile;
|
|
300
|
+
CodecProfile?: AacCodecProfile | undefined;
|
|
301
301
|
/**
|
|
302
302
|
* The Coding mode that you specify determines the number of audio channels and the audio channel layout metadata in your AAC output. Valid coding modes depend on the Rate control mode and Profile that you select. The following list shows the number of audio channels and channel layout for each coding mode. * 1.0 Audio Description (Receiver Mix): One channel, C. Includes audio description data from your stereo input. For more information see ETSI TS 101 154 Annex E. * 1.0 Mono: One channel, C. * 2.0 Stereo: Two channels, L, R. * 5.1 Surround: Six channels, C, L, R, Ls, Rs, LFE.
|
|
303
303
|
* @public
|
|
304
304
|
*/
|
|
305
|
-
CodingMode?: AacCodingMode;
|
|
305
|
+
CodingMode?: AacCodingMode | undefined;
|
|
306
306
|
/**
|
|
307
307
|
* Specify the AAC rate control mode. For a constant bitrate: Choose CBR. Your AAC output bitrate will be equal to the value that you choose for Bitrate. For a variable bitrate: Choose VBR. Your AAC output bitrate will vary according to your audio content and the value that you choose for Bitrate quality.
|
|
308
308
|
* @public
|
|
309
309
|
*/
|
|
310
|
-
RateControlMode?: AacRateControlMode;
|
|
310
|
+
RateControlMode?: AacRateControlMode | undefined;
|
|
311
311
|
/**
|
|
312
312
|
* Enables LATM/LOAS AAC output. Note that if you use LATM/LOAS AAC in an output, you must choose "No container" for the output container.
|
|
313
313
|
* @public
|
|
314
314
|
*/
|
|
315
|
-
RawFormat?: AacRawFormat;
|
|
315
|
+
RawFormat?: AacRawFormat | undefined;
|
|
316
316
|
/**
|
|
317
317
|
* Specify the AAC sample rate in samples per second (Hz). Valid sample rates depend on the AAC profile and Coding mode that you select. For a list of supported sample rates, see: https://docs.aws.amazon.com/mediaconvert/latest/ug/aac-support.html
|
|
318
318
|
* @public
|
|
319
319
|
*/
|
|
320
|
-
SampleRate?: number;
|
|
320
|
+
SampleRate?: number | undefined;
|
|
321
321
|
/**
|
|
322
322
|
* Use MPEG-2 AAC instead of MPEG-4 AAC audio for raw or MPEG-2 Transport Stream containers.
|
|
323
323
|
* @public
|
|
324
324
|
*/
|
|
325
|
-
Specification?: AacSpecification;
|
|
325
|
+
Specification?: AacSpecification | undefined;
|
|
326
326
|
/**
|
|
327
327
|
* Specify the quality of your variable bitrate (VBR) AAC audio. For a list of approximate VBR bitrates, see: https://docs.aws.amazon.com/mediaconvert/latest/ug/aac-support.html#aac_vbr
|
|
328
328
|
* @public
|
|
329
329
|
*/
|
|
330
|
-
VbrQuality?: AacVbrQuality;
|
|
330
|
+
VbrQuality?: AacVbrQuality | undefined;
|
|
331
331
|
}
|
|
332
332
|
/**
|
|
333
333
|
* @public
|
|
@@ -438,52 +438,52 @@ export interface Ac3Settings {
|
|
|
438
438
|
* Specify the average bitrate in bits per second. The bitrate that you specify must be a multiple of 8000 within the allowed minimum and maximum values. Leave blank to use the default bitrate for the coding mode you select according ETSI TS 102 366. Valid bitrates for coding mode 1/0: Default: 96000. Minimum: 64000. Maximum: 128000. Valid bitrates for coding mode 1/1: Default: 192000. Minimum: 128000. Maximum: 384000. Valid bitrates for coding mode 2/0: Default: 192000. Minimum: 128000. Maximum: 384000. Valid bitrates for coding mode 3/2 with FLE: Default: 384000. Minimum: 384000. Maximum: 640000.
|
|
439
439
|
* @public
|
|
440
440
|
*/
|
|
441
|
-
Bitrate?: number;
|
|
441
|
+
Bitrate?: number | undefined;
|
|
442
442
|
/**
|
|
443
443
|
* Specify the bitstream mode for the AC-3 stream that the encoder emits. For more information about the AC3 bitstream mode, see ATSC A/52-2012 (Annex E).
|
|
444
444
|
* @public
|
|
445
445
|
*/
|
|
446
|
-
BitstreamMode?: Ac3BitstreamMode;
|
|
446
|
+
BitstreamMode?: Ac3BitstreamMode | undefined;
|
|
447
447
|
/**
|
|
448
448
|
* Dolby Digital coding mode. Determines number of channels.
|
|
449
449
|
* @public
|
|
450
450
|
*/
|
|
451
|
-
CodingMode?: Ac3CodingMode;
|
|
451
|
+
CodingMode?: Ac3CodingMode | undefined;
|
|
452
452
|
/**
|
|
453
453
|
* Sets the dialnorm for the output. If blank and input audio is Dolby Digital, dialnorm will be passed through.
|
|
454
454
|
* @public
|
|
455
455
|
*/
|
|
456
|
-
Dialnorm?: number;
|
|
456
|
+
Dialnorm?: number | undefined;
|
|
457
457
|
/**
|
|
458
458
|
* Choose the Dolby Digital dynamic range control (DRC) profile that MediaConvert uses when encoding the metadata in the Dolby Digital stream for the line operating mode. Related setting: When you use this setting, MediaConvert ignores any value you provide for Dynamic range compression profile. For information about the Dolby Digital DRC operating modes and profiles, see the Dynamic Range Control chapter of the Dolby Metadata Guide at https://developer.dolby.com/globalassets/professional/documents/dolby-metadata-guide.pdf.
|
|
459
459
|
* @public
|
|
460
460
|
*/
|
|
461
|
-
DynamicRangeCompressionLine?: Ac3DynamicRangeCompressionLine;
|
|
461
|
+
DynamicRangeCompressionLine?: Ac3DynamicRangeCompressionLine | undefined;
|
|
462
462
|
/**
|
|
463
463
|
* When you want to add Dolby dynamic range compression (DRC) signaling to your output stream, we recommend that you use the mode-specific settings instead of Dynamic range compression profile. The mode-specific settings are Dynamic range compression profile, line mode and Dynamic range compression profile, RF mode. Note that when you specify values for all three settings, MediaConvert ignores the value of this setting in favor of the mode-specific settings. If you do use this setting instead of the mode-specific settings, choose None to leave out DRC signaling. Keep the default Film standard to set the profile to Dolby's film standard profile for all operating modes.
|
|
464
464
|
* @public
|
|
465
465
|
*/
|
|
466
|
-
DynamicRangeCompressionProfile?: Ac3DynamicRangeCompressionProfile;
|
|
466
|
+
DynamicRangeCompressionProfile?: Ac3DynamicRangeCompressionProfile | undefined;
|
|
467
467
|
/**
|
|
468
468
|
* Choose the Dolby Digital dynamic range control (DRC) profile that MediaConvert uses when encoding the metadata in the Dolby Digital stream for the RF operating mode. Related setting: When you use this setting, MediaConvert ignores any value you provide for Dynamic range compression profile. For information about the Dolby Digital DRC operating modes and profiles, see the Dynamic Range Control chapter of the Dolby Metadata Guide at https://developer.dolby.com/globalassets/professional/documents/dolby-metadata-guide.pdf.
|
|
469
469
|
* @public
|
|
470
470
|
*/
|
|
471
|
-
DynamicRangeCompressionRf?: Ac3DynamicRangeCompressionRf;
|
|
471
|
+
DynamicRangeCompressionRf?: Ac3DynamicRangeCompressionRf | undefined;
|
|
472
472
|
/**
|
|
473
473
|
* Applies a 120Hz lowpass filter to the LFE channel prior to encoding. Only valid with 3_2_LFE coding mode.
|
|
474
474
|
* @public
|
|
475
475
|
*/
|
|
476
|
-
LfeFilter?: Ac3LfeFilter;
|
|
476
|
+
LfeFilter?: Ac3LfeFilter | undefined;
|
|
477
477
|
/**
|
|
478
478
|
* When set to FOLLOW_INPUT, encoder metadata will be sourced from the DD, DD+, or DolbyE decoder that supplied this audio data. If audio was not supplied from one of these streams, then the static metadata settings will be used.
|
|
479
479
|
* @public
|
|
480
480
|
*/
|
|
481
|
-
MetadataControl?: Ac3MetadataControl;
|
|
481
|
+
MetadataControl?: Ac3MetadataControl | undefined;
|
|
482
482
|
/**
|
|
483
483
|
* This value is always 48000. It represents the sample rate in Hz.
|
|
484
484
|
* @public
|
|
485
485
|
*/
|
|
486
|
-
SampleRate?: number;
|
|
486
|
+
SampleRate?: number | undefined;
|
|
487
487
|
}
|
|
488
488
|
/**
|
|
489
489
|
* Required when you set Codec to the value AIFF.
|
|
@@ -494,17 +494,17 @@ export interface AiffSettings {
|
|
|
494
494
|
* Specify Bit depth, in bits per sample, to choose the encoding quality for this audio track.
|
|
495
495
|
* @public
|
|
496
496
|
*/
|
|
497
|
-
BitDepth?: number;
|
|
497
|
+
BitDepth?: number | undefined;
|
|
498
498
|
/**
|
|
499
499
|
* Specify the number of channels in this output audio track. Valid values are 1 and even numbers up to 64. For example, 1, 2, 4, 6, and so on, up to 64.
|
|
500
500
|
* @public
|
|
501
501
|
*/
|
|
502
|
-
Channels?: number;
|
|
502
|
+
Channels?: number | undefined;
|
|
503
503
|
/**
|
|
504
504
|
* Sample rate in Hz.
|
|
505
505
|
* @public
|
|
506
506
|
*/
|
|
507
|
-
SampleRate?: number;
|
|
507
|
+
SampleRate?: number | undefined;
|
|
508
508
|
}
|
|
509
509
|
/**
|
|
510
510
|
* @public
|
|
@@ -672,87 +672,87 @@ export interface Eac3AtmosSettings {
|
|
|
672
672
|
* Specify the average bitrate for this output in bits per second. Valid values: 384k, 448k, 576k, 640k, 768k, 1024k Default value: 448k Note that MediaConvert supports 384k only with channel-based immersive (CBI) 7.1.4 and 5.1.4 inputs. For CBI 9.1.6 and other input types, MediaConvert automatically increases your output bitrate to 448k.
|
|
673
673
|
* @public
|
|
674
674
|
*/
|
|
675
|
-
Bitrate?: number;
|
|
675
|
+
Bitrate?: number | undefined;
|
|
676
676
|
/**
|
|
677
677
|
* Specify the bitstream mode for the E-AC-3 stream that the encoder emits. For more information about the EAC3 bitstream mode, see ATSC A/52-2012 (Annex E).
|
|
678
678
|
* @public
|
|
679
679
|
*/
|
|
680
|
-
BitstreamMode?: Eac3AtmosBitstreamMode;
|
|
680
|
+
BitstreamMode?: Eac3AtmosBitstreamMode | undefined;
|
|
681
681
|
/**
|
|
682
682
|
* The coding mode for Dolby Digital Plus JOC (Atmos).
|
|
683
683
|
* @public
|
|
684
684
|
*/
|
|
685
|
-
CodingMode?: Eac3AtmosCodingMode;
|
|
685
|
+
CodingMode?: Eac3AtmosCodingMode | undefined;
|
|
686
686
|
/**
|
|
687
687
|
* Enable Dolby Dialogue Intelligence to adjust loudness based on dialogue analysis.
|
|
688
688
|
* @public
|
|
689
689
|
*/
|
|
690
|
-
DialogueIntelligence?: Eac3AtmosDialogueIntelligence;
|
|
690
|
+
DialogueIntelligence?: Eac3AtmosDialogueIntelligence | undefined;
|
|
691
691
|
/**
|
|
692
692
|
* Specify whether MediaConvert should use any downmix metadata from your input file. Keep the default value, Custom to provide downmix values in your job settings. Choose Follow source to use the metadata from your input. Related settings--Use these settings to specify your downmix values: Left only/Right only surround, Left total/Right total surround, Left total/Right total center, Left only/Right only center, and Stereo downmix. When you keep Custom for Downmix control and you don't specify values for the related settings, MediaConvert uses default values for those settings.
|
|
693
693
|
* @public
|
|
694
694
|
*/
|
|
695
|
-
DownmixControl?: Eac3AtmosDownmixControl;
|
|
695
|
+
DownmixControl?: Eac3AtmosDownmixControl | undefined;
|
|
696
696
|
/**
|
|
697
697
|
* Choose the Dolby dynamic range control (DRC) profile that MediaConvert uses when encoding the metadata in the Dolby stream for the line operating mode. Default value: Film light Related setting: To have MediaConvert use the value you specify here, keep the default value, Custom for the setting Dynamic range control. Otherwise, MediaConvert ignores Dynamic range compression line. For information about the Dolby DRC operating modes and profiles, see the Dynamic Range Control chapter of the Dolby Metadata Guide at https://developer.dolby.com/globalassets/professional/documents/dolby-metadata-guide.pdf.
|
|
698
698
|
* @public
|
|
699
699
|
*/
|
|
700
|
-
DynamicRangeCompressionLine?: Eac3AtmosDynamicRangeCompressionLine;
|
|
700
|
+
DynamicRangeCompressionLine?: Eac3AtmosDynamicRangeCompressionLine | undefined;
|
|
701
701
|
/**
|
|
702
702
|
* Choose the Dolby dynamic range control (DRC) profile that MediaConvert uses when encoding the metadata in the Dolby stream for the RF operating mode. Default value: Film light Related setting: To have MediaConvert use the value you specify here, keep the default value, Custom for the setting Dynamic range control. Otherwise, MediaConvert ignores Dynamic range compression RF. For information about the Dolby DRC operating modes and profiles, see the Dynamic Range Control chapter of the Dolby Metadata Guide at https://developer.dolby.com/globalassets/professional/documents/dolby-metadata-guide.pdf.
|
|
703
703
|
* @public
|
|
704
704
|
*/
|
|
705
|
-
DynamicRangeCompressionRf?: Eac3AtmosDynamicRangeCompressionRf;
|
|
705
|
+
DynamicRangeCompressionRf?: Eac3AtmosDynamicRangeCompressionRf | undefined;
|
|
706
706
|
/**
|
|
707
707
|
* Specify whether MediaConvert should use any dynamic range control metadata from your input file. Keep the default value, Custom, to provide dynamic range control values in your job settings. Choose Follow source to use the metadata from your input. Related settings--Use these settings to specify your dynamic range control values: Dynamic range compression line and Dynamic range compression RF. When you keep the value Custom for Dynamic range control and you don't specify values for the related settings, MediaConvert uses default values for those settings.
|
|
708
708
|
* @public
|
|
709
709
|
*/
|
|
710
|
-
DynamicRangeControl?: Eac3AtmosDynamicRangeControl;
|
|
710
|
+
DynamicRangeControl?: Eac3AtmosDynamicRangeControl | undefined;
|
|
711
711
|
/**
|
|
712
712
|
* Specify a value for the following Dolby Atmos setting: Left only/Right only center mix (Lo/Ro center). MediaConvert uses this value for downmixing. Default value: -3 dB. Valid values: 3.0, 1.5, 0.0, -1.5, -3.0, -4.5, and -6.0. Related setting: How the service uses this value depends on the value that you choose for Stereo downmix. Related setting: To have MediaConvert use this value, keep the default value, Custom for the setting Downmix control. Otherwise, MediaConvert ignores Left only/Right only center.
|
|
713
713
|
* @public
|
|
714
714
|
*/
|
|
715
|
-
LoRoCenterMixLevel?: number;
|
|
715
|
+
LoRoCenterMixLevel?: number | undefined;
|
|
716
716
|
/**
|
|
717
717
|
* Specify a value for the following Dolby Atmos setting: Left only/Right only. MediaConvert uses this value for downmixing. Default value: -3 dB. Valid values: -1.5, -3.0, -4.5, -6.0, and -60. The value -60 mutes the channel. Related setting: How the service uses this value depends on the value that you choose for Stereo downmix. Related setting: To have MediaConvert use this value, keep the default value, Custom for the setting Downmix control. Otherwise, MediaConvert ignores Left only/Right only surround.
|
|
718
718
|
* @public
|
|
719
719
|
*/
|
|
720
|
-
LoRoSurroundMixLevel?: number;
|
|
720
|
+
LoRoSurroundMixLevel?: number | undefined;
|
|
721
721
|
/**
|
|
722
722
|
* Specify a value for the following Dolby Atmos setting: Left total/Right total center mix (Lt/Rt center). MediaConvert uses this value for downmixing. Default value: -3 dB Valid values: 3.0, 1.5, 0.0, -1.5, -3.0, -4.5, and -6.0. Related setting: How the service uses this value depends on the value that you choose for Stereo downmix. Related setting: To have MediaConvert use this value, keep the default value, Custom for the setting Downmix control. Otherwise, MediaConvert ignores Left total/Right total center.
|
|
723
723
|
* @public
|
|
724
724
|
*/
|
|
725
|
-
LtRtCenterMixLevel?: number;
|
|
725
|
+
LtRtCenterMixLevel?: number | undefined;
|
|
726
726
|
/**
|
|
727
727
|
* Specify a value for the following Dolby Atmos setting: Left total/Right total surround mix (Lt/Rt surround). MediaConvert uses this value for downmixing. Default value: -3 dB Valid values: -1.5, -3.0, -4.5, -6.0, and -60. The value -60 mutes the channel. Related setting: How the service uses this value depends on the value that you choose for Stereo downmix. Related setting: To have MediaConvert use this value, keep the default value, Custom for the setting Downmix control. Otherwise, the service ignores Left total/Right total surround.
|
|
728
728
|
* @public
|
|
729
729
|
*/
|
|
730
|
-
LtRtSurroundMixLevel?: number;
|
|
730
|
+
LtRtSurroundMixLevel?: number | undefined;
|
|
731
731
|
/**
|
|
732
732
|
* Choose how the service meters the loudness of your audio.
|
|
733
733
|
* @public
|
|
734
734
|
*/
|
|
735
|
-
MeteringMode?: Eac3AtmosMeteringMode;
|
|
735
|
+
MeteringMode?: Eac3AtmosMeteringMode | undefined;
|
|
736
736
|
/**
|
|
737
737
|
* This value is always 48000. It represents the sample rate in Hz.
|
|
738
738
|
* @public
|
|
739
739
|
*/
|
|
740
|
-
SampleRate?: number;
|
|
740
|
+
SampleRate?: number | undefined;
|
|
741
741
|
/**
|
|
742
742
|
* Specify the percentage of audio content, from 0% to 100%, that must be speech in order for the encoder to use the measured speech loudness as the overall program loudness. Default value: 15%
|
|
743
743
|
* @public
|
|
744
744
|
*/
|
|
745
|
-
SpeechThreshold?: number;
|
|
745
|
+
SpeechThreshold?: number | undefined;
|
|
746
746
|
/**
|
|
747
747
|
* Choose how the service does stereo downmixing. Default value: Not indicated Related setting: To have MediaConvert use this value, keep the default value, Custom for the setting Downmix control. Otherwise, MediaConvert ignores Stereo downmix.
|
|
748
748
|
* @public
|
|
749
749
|
*/
|
|
750
|
-
StereoDownmix?: Eac3AtmosStereoDownmix;
|
|
750
|
+
StereoDownmix?: Eac3AtmosStereoDownmix | undefined;
|
|
751
751
|
/**
|
|
752
752
|
* Specify whether your input audio has an additional center rear surround channel matrix encoded into your left and right surround channels.
|
|
753
753
|
* @public
|
|
754
754
|
*/
|
|
755
|
-
SurroundExMode?: Eac3AtmosSurroundExMode;
|
|
755
|
+
SurroundExMode?: Eac3AtmosSurroundExMode | undefined;
|
|
756
756
|
}
|
|
757
757
|
/**
|
|
758
758
|
* @public
|
|
@@ -947,107 +947,107 @@ export interface Eac3Settings {
|
|
|
947
947
|
* If set to ATTENUATE_3_DB, applies a 3 dB attenuation to the surround channels. Only used for 3/2 coding mode.
|
|
948
948
|
* @public
|
|
949
949
|
*/
|
|
950
|
-
AttenuationControl?: Eac3AttenuationControl;
|
|
950
|
+
AttenuationControl?: Eac3AttenuationControl | undefined;
|
|
951
951
|
/**
|
|
952
952
|
* Specify the average bitrate in bits per second. The bitrate that you specify must be a multiple of 8000 within the allowed minimum and maximum values. Leave blank to use the default bitrate for the coding mode you select according ETSI TS 102 366. Valid bitrates for coding mode 1/0: Default: 96000. Minimum: 32000. Maximum: 3024000. Valid bitrates for coding mode 2/0: Default: 192000. Minimum: 96000. Maximum: 3024000. Valid bitrates for coding mode 3/2: Default: 384000. Minimum: 192000. Maximum: 3024000.
|
|
953
953
|
* @public
|
|
954
954
|
*/
|
|
955
|
-
Bitrate?: number;
|
|
955
|
+
Bitrate?: number | undefined;
|
|
956
956
|
/**
|
|
957
957
|
* Specify the bitstream mode for the E-AC-3 stream that the encoder emits. For more information about the EAC3 bitstream mode, see ATSC A/52-2012 (Annex E).
|
|
958
958
|
* @public
|
|
959
959
|
*/
|
|
960
|
-
BitstreamMode?: Eac3BitstreamMode;
|
|
960
|
+
BitstreamMode?: Eac3BitstreamMode | undefined;
|
|
961
961
|
/**
|
|
962
962
|
* Dolby Digital Plus coding mode. Determines number of channels.
|
|
963
963
|
* @public
|
|
964
964
|
*/
|
|
965
|
-
CodingMode?: Eac3CodingMode;
|
|
965
|
+
CodingMode?: Eac3CodingMode | undefined;
|
|
966
966
|
/**
|
|
967
967
|
* Activates a DC highpass filter for all input channels.
|
|
968
968
|
* @public
|
|
969
969
|
*/
|
|
970
|
-
DcFilter?: Eac3DcFilter;
|
|
970
|
+
DcFilter?: Eac3DcFilter | undefined;
|
|
971
971
|
/**
|
|
972
972
|
* Sets the dialnorm for the output. If blank and input audio is Dolby Digital Plus, dialnorm will be passed through.
|
|
973
973
|
* @public
|
|
974
974
|
*/
|
|
975
|
-
Dialnorm?: number;
|
|
975
|
+
Dialnorm?: number | undefined;
|
|
976
976
|
/**
|
|
977
977
|
* Choose the Dolby Digital dynamic range control (DRC) profile that MediaConvert uses when encoding the metadata in the Dolby Digital stream for the line operating mode. Related setting: When you use this setting, MediaConvert ignores any value you provide for Dynamic range compression profile. For information about the Dolby Digital DRC operating modes and profiles, see the Dynamic Range Control chapter of the Dolby Metadata Guide at https://developer.dolby.com/globalassets/professional/documents/dolby-metadata-guide.pdf.
|
|
978
978
|
* @public
|
|
979
979
|
*/
|
|
980
|
-
DynamicRangeCompressionLine?: Eac3DynamicRangeCompressionLine;
|
|
980
|
+
DynamicRangeCompressionLine?: Eac3DynamicRangeCompressionLine | undefined;
|
|
981
981
|
/**
|
|
982
982
|
* Choose the Dolby Digital dynamic range control (DRC) profile that MediaConvert uses when encoding the metadata in the Dolby Digital stream for the RF operating mode. Related setting: When you use this setting, MediaConvert ignores any value you provide for Dynamic range compression profile. For information about the Dolby Digital DRC operating modes and profiles, see the Dynamic Range Control chapter of the Dolby Metadata Guide at https://developer.dolby.com/globalassets/professional/documents/dolby-metadata-guide.pdf.
|
|
983
983
|
* @public
|
|
984
984
|
*/
|
|
985
|
-
DynamicRangeCompressionRf?: Eac3DynamicRangeCompressionRf;
|
|
985
|
+
DynamicRangeCompressionRf?: Eac3DynamicRangeCompressionRf | undefined;
|
|
986
986
|
/**
|
|
987
987
|
* When encoding 3/2 audio, controls whether the LFE channel is enabled
|
|
988
988
|
* @public
|
|
989
989
|
*/
|
|
990
|
-
LfeControl?: Eac3LfeControl;
|
|
990
|
+
LfeControl?: Eac3LfeControl | undefined;
|
|
991
991
|
/**
|
|
992
992
|
* Applies a 120Hz lowpass filter to the LFE channel prior to encoding. Only valid with 3_2_LFE coding mode.
|
|
993
993
|
* @public
|
|
994
994
|
*/
|
|
995
|
-
LfeFilter?: Eac3LfeFilter;
|
|
995
|
+
LfeFilter?: Eac3LfeFilter | undefined;
|
|
996
996
|
/**
|
|
997
997
|
* Specify a value for the following Dolby Digital Plus setting: Left only/Right only center mix. MediaConvert uses this value for downmixing. How the service uses this value depends on the value that you choose for Stereo downmix. Valid values: 3.0, 1.5, 0.0, -1.5, -3.0, -4.5, -6.0, and -60. The value -60 mutes the channel. This setting applies only if you keep the default value of 3/2 - L, R, C, Ls, Rs for the setting Coding mode. If you choose a different value for Coding mode, the service ignores Left only/Right only center.
|
|
998
998
|
* @public
|
|
999
999
|
*/
|
|
1000
|
-
LoRoCenterMixLevel?: number;
|
|
1000
|
+
LoRoCenterMixLevel?: number | undefined;
|
|
1001
1001
|
/**
|
|
1002
1002
|
* Specify a value for the following Dolby Digital Plus setting: Left only/Right only. MediaConvert uses this value for downmixing. How the service uses this value depends on the value that you choose for Stereo downmix. Valid values: -1.5, -3.0, -4.5, -6.0, and -60. The value -60 mutes the channel. This setting applies only if you keep the default value of 3/2 - L, R, C, Ls, Rs for the setting Coding mode. If you choose a different value for Coding mode, the service ignores Left only/Right only surround.
|
|
1003
1003
|
* @public
|
|
1004
1004
|
*/
|
|
1005
|
-
LoRoSurroundMixLevel?: number;
|
|
1005
|
+
LoRoSurroundMixLevel?: number | undefined;
|
|
1006
1006
|
/**
|
|
1007
1007
|
* Specify a value for the following Dolby Digital Plus setting: Left total/Right total center mix. MediaConvert uses this value for downmixing. How the service uses this value depends on the value that you choose for Stereo downmix. Valid values: 3.0, 1.5, 0.0, -1.5, -3.0, -4.5, -6.0, and -60. The value -60 mutes the channel. This setting applies only if you keep the default value of 3/2 - L, R, C, Ls, Rs for the setting Coding mode. If you choose a different value for Coding mode, the service ignores Left total/Right total center.
|
|
1008
1008
|
* @public
|
|
1009
1009
|
*/
|
|
1010
|
-
LtRtCenterMixLevel?: number;
|
|
1010
|
+
LtRtCenterMixLevel?: number | undefined;
|
|
1011
1011
|
/**
|
|
1012
1012
|
* Specify a value for the following Dolby Digital Plus setting: Left total/Right total surround mix. MediaConvert uses this value for downmixing. How the service uses this value depends on the value that you choose for Stereo downmix. Valid values: -1.5, -3.0, -4.5, -6.0, and -60. The value -60 mutes the channel. This setting applies only if you keep the default value of 3/2 - L, R, C, Ls, Rs for the setting Coding mode. If you choose a different value for Coding mode, the service ignores Left total/Right total surround.
|
|
1013
1013
|
* @public
|
|
1014
1014
|
*/
|
|
1015
|
-
LtRtSurroundMixLevel?: number;
|
|
1015
|
+
LtRtSurroundMixLevel?: number | undefined;
|
|
1016
1016
|
/**
|
|
1017
1017
|
* When set to FOLLOW_INPUT, encoder metadata will be sourced from the DD, DD+, or DolbyE decoder that supplied this audio data. If audio was not supplied from one of these streams, then the static metadata settings will be used.
|
|
1018
1018
|
* @public
|
|
1019
1019
|
*/
|
|
1020
|
-
MetadataControl?: Eac3MetadataControl;
|
|
1020
|
+
MetadataControl?: Eac3MetadataControl | undefined;
|
|
1021
1021
|
/**
|
|
1022
1022
|
* When set to WHEN_POSSIBLE, input DD+ audio will be passed through if it is present on the input. this detection is dynamic over the life of the transcode. Inputs that alternate between DD+ and non-DD+ content will have a consistent DD+ output as the system alternates between passthrough and encoding.
|
|
1023
1023
|
* @public
|
|
1024
1024
|
*/
|
|
1025
|
-
PassthroughControl?: Eac3PassthroughControl;
|
|
1025
|
+
PassthroughControl?: Eac3PassthroughControl | undefined;
|
|
1026
1026
|
/**
|
|
1027
1027
|
* Controls the amount of phase-shift applied to the surround channels. Only used for 3/2 coding mode.
|
|
1028
1028
|
* @public
|
|
1029
1029
|
*/
|
|
1030
|
-
PhaseControl?: Eac3PhaseControl;
|
|
1030
|
+
PhaseControl?: Eac3PhaseControl | undefined;
|
|
1031
1031
|
/**
|
|
1032
1032
|
* This value is always 48000. It represents the sample rate in Hz.
|
|
1033
1033
|
* @public
|
|
1034
1034
|
*/
|
|
1035
|
-
SampleRate?: number;
|
|
1035
|
+
SampleRate?: number | undefined;
|
|
1036
1036
|
/**
|
|
1037
1037
|
* Choose how the service does stereo downmixing. This setting only applies if you keep the default value of 3/2 - L, R, C, Ls, Rs for the setting Coding mode. If you choose a different value for Coding mode, the service ignores Stereo downmix.
|
|
1038
1038
|
* @public
|
|
1039
1039
|
*/
|
|
1040
|
-
StereoDownmix?: Eac3StereoDownmix;
|
|
1040
|
+
StereoDownmix?: Eac3StereoDownmix | undefined;
|
|
1041
1041
|
/**
|
|
1042
1042
|
* When encoding 3/2 audio, sets whether an extra center back surround channel is matrix encoded into the left and right surround channels.
|
|
1043
1043
|
* @public
|
|
1044
1044
|
*/
|
|
1045
|
-
SurroundExMode?: Eac3SurroundExMode;
|
|
1045
|
+
SurroundExMode?: Eac3SurroundExMode | undefined;
|
|
1046
1046
|
/**
|
|
1047
1047
|
* When encoding 2/0 audio, sets whether Dolby Surround is matrix encoded into the two channels.
|
|
1048
1048
|
* @public
|
|
1049
1049
|
*/
|
|
1050
|
-
SurroundMode?: Eac3SurroundMode;
|
|
1050
|
+
SurroundMode?: Eac3SurroundMode | undefined;
|
|
1051
1051
|
}
|
|
1052
1052
|
/**
|
|
1053
1053
|
* Required when you set Codec, under AudioDescriptions>CodecSettings, to the value FLAC.
|
|
@@ -1058,17 +1058,17 @@ export interface FlacSettings {
|
|
|
1058
1058
|
* Specify Bit depth (BitDepth), in bits per sample, to choose the encoding quality for this audio track.
|
|
1059
1059
|
* @public
|
|
1060
1060
|
*/
|
|
1061
|
-
BitDepth?: number;
|
|
1061
|
+
BitDepth?: number | undefined;
|
|
1062
1062
|
/**
|
|
1063
1063
|
* Specify the number of channels in this output audio track. Choosing Mono on the console gives you 1 output channel; choosing Stereo gives you 2. In the API, valid values are between 1 and 8.
|
|
1064
1064
|
* @public
|
|
1065
1065
|
*/
|
|
1066
|
-
Channels?: number;
|
|
1066
|
+
Channels?: number | undefined;
|
|
1067
1067
|
/**
|
|
1068
1068
|
* Sample rate in Hz.
|
|
1069
1069
|
* @public
|
|
1070
1070
|
*/
|
|
1071
|
-
SampleRate?: number;
|
|
1071
|
+
SampleRate?: number | undefined;
|
|
1072
1072
|
}
|
|
1073
1073
|
/**
|
|
1074
1074
|
* Required when you set Codec to the value MP2.
|
|
@@ -1079,17 +1079,17 @@ export interface Mp2Settings {
|
|
|
1079
1079
|
* Specify the average bitrate in bits per second.
|
|
1080
1080
|
* @public
|
|
1081
1081
|
*/
|
|
1082
|
-
Bitrate?: number;
|
|
1082
|
+
Bitrate?: number | undefined;
|
|
1083
1083
|
/**
|
|
1084
1084
|
* Set Channels to specify the number of channels in this output audio track. Choosing Mono in will give you 1 output channel; choosing Stereo will give you 2. In the API, valid values are 1 and 2.
|
|
1085
1085
|
* @public
|
|
1086
1086
|
*/
|
|
1087
|
-
Channels?: number;
|
|
1087
|
+
Channels?: number | undefined;
|
|
1088
1088
|
/**
|
|
1089
1089
|
* Sample rate in Hz.
|
|
1090
1090
|
* @public
|
|
1091
1091
|
*/
|
|
1092
|
-
SampleRate?: number;
|
|
1092
|
+
SampleRate?: number | undefined;
|
|
1093
1093
|
}
|
|
1094
1094
|
/**
|
|
1095
1095
|
* @public
|
|
@@ -1112,27 +1112,27 @@ export interface Mp3Settings {
|
|
|
1112
1112
|
* Specify the average bitrate in bits per second.
|
|
1113
1113
|
* @public
|
|
1114
1114
|
*/
|
|
1115
|
-
Bitrate?: number;
|
|
1115
|
+
Bitrate?: number | undefined;
|
|
1116
1116
|
/**
|
|
1117
1117
|
* Specify the number of channels in this output audio track. Choosing Mono gives you 1 output channel; choosing Stereo gives you 2. In the API, valid values are 1 and 2.
|
|
1118
1118
|
* @public
|
|
1119
1119
|
*/
|
|
1120
|
-
Channels?: number;
|
|
1120
|
+
Channels?: number | undefined;
|
|
1121
1121
|
/**
|
|
1122
1122
|
* Specify whether the service encodes this MP3 audio output with a constant bitrate (CBR) or a variable bitrate (VBR).
|
|
1123
1123
|
* @public
|
|
1124
1124
|
*/
|
|
1125
|
-
RateControlMode?: Mp3RateControlMode;
|
|
1125
|
+
RateControlMode?: Mp3RateControlMode | undefined;
|
|
1126
1126
|
/**
|
|
1127
1127
|
* Sample rate in Hz.
|
|
1128
1128
|
* @public
|
|
1129
1129
|
*/
|
|
1130
|
-
SampleRate?: number;
|
|
1130
|
+
SampleRate?: number | undefined;
|
|
1131
1131
|
/**
|
|
1132
1132
|
* Required when you set Bitrate control mode to VBR. Specify the audio quality of this MP3 output from 0 (highest quality) to 9 (lowest quality).
|
|
1133
1133
|
* @public
|
|
1134
1134
|
*/
|
|
1135
|
-
VbrQuality?: number;
|
|
1135
|
+
VbrQuality?: number | undefined;
|
|
1136
1136
|
}
|
|
1137
1137
|
/**
|
|
1138
1138
|
* Required when you set Codec, under AudioDescriptions>CodecSettings, to the value OPUS.
|
|
@@ -1143,17 +1143,17 @@ export interface OpusSettings {
|
|
|
1143
1143
|
* Optional. Specify the average bitrate in bits per second. Valid values are multiples of 8000, from 32000 through 192000. The default value is 96000, which we recommend for quality and bandwidth.
|
|
1144
1144
|
* @public
|
|
1145
1145
|
*/
|
|
1146
|
-
Bitrate?: number;
|
|
1146
|
+
Bitrate?: number | undefined;
|
|
1147
1147
|
/**
|
|
1148
1148
|
* Specify the number of channels in this output audio track. Choosing Mono on gives you 1 output channel; choosing Stereo gives you 2. In the API, valid values are 1 and 2.
|
|
1149
1149
|
* @public
|
|
1150
1150
|
*/
|
|
1151
|
-
Channels?: number;
|
|
1151
|
+
Channels?: number | undefined;
|
|
1152
1152
|
/**
|
|
1153
1153
|
* Optional. Sample rate in Hz. Valid values are 16000, 24000, and 48000. The default value is 48000.
|
|
1154
1154
|
* @public
|
|
1155
1155
|
*/
|
|
1156
|
-
SampleRate?: number;
|
|
1156
|
+
SampleRate?: number | undefined;
|
|
1157
1157
|
}
|
|
1158
1158
|
/**
|
|
1159
1159
|
* Required when you set Codec, under AudioDescriptions>CodecSettings, to the value Vorbis.
|
|
@@ -1164,17 +1164,17 @@ export interface VorbisSettings {
|
|
|
1164
1164
|
* Optional. Specify the number of channels in this output audio track. Choosing Mono on the console gives you 1 output channel; choosing Stereo gives you 2. In the API, valid values are 1 and 2. The default value is 2.
|
|
1165
1165
|
* @public
|
|
1166
1166
|
*/
|
|
1167
|
-
Channels?: number;
|
|
1167
|
+
Channels?: number | undefined;
|
|
1168
1168
|
/**
|
|
1169
1169
|
* Optional. Specify the audio sample rate in Hz. Valid values are 22050, 32000, 44100, and 48000. The default value is 48000.
|
|
1170
1170
|
* @public
|
|
1171
1171
|
*/
|
|
1172
|
-
SampleRate?: number;
|
|
1172
|
+
SampleRate?: number | undefined;
|
|
1173
1173
|
/**
|
|
1174
1174
|
* Optional. Specify the variable audio quality of this Vorbis output from -1 (lowest quality, ~45 kbit/s) to 10 (highest quality, ~500 kbit/s). The default value is 4 (~128 kbit/s). Values 5 and 6 are approximately 160 and 192 kbit/s, respectively.
|
|
1175
1175
|
* @public
|
|
1176
1176
|
*/
|
|
1177
|
-
VbrQuality?: number;
|
|
1177
|
+
VbrQuality?: number | undefined;
|
|
1178
1178
|
}
|
|
1179
1179
|
/**
|
|
1180
1180
|
* @public
|
|
@@ -1197,22 +1197,22 @@ export interface WavSettings {
|
|
|
1197
1197
|
* Specify Bit depth, in bits per sample, to choose the encoding quality for this audio track.
|
|
1198
1198
|
* @public
|
|
1199
1199
|
*/
|
|
1200
|
-
BitDepth?: number;
|
|
1200
|
+
BitDepth?: number | undefined;
|
|
1201
1201
|
/**
|
|
1202
1202
|
* Specify the number of channels in this output audio track. Valid values are 1 and even numbers up to 64. For example, 1, 2, 4, 6, and so on, up to 64.
|
|
1203
1203
|
* @public
|
|
1204
1204
|
*/
|
|
1205
|
-
Channels?: number;
|
|
1205
|
+
Channels?: number | undefined;
|
|
1206
1206
|
/**
|
|
1207
1207
|
* The service defaults to using RIFF for WAV outputs. If your output audio is likely to exceed 4 GB in file size, or if you otherwise need the extended support of the RF64 format, set your output WAV file format to RF64.
|
|
1208
1208
|
* @public
|
|
1209
1209
|
*/
|
|
1210
|
-
Format?: WavFormat;
|
|
1210
|
+
Format?: WavFormat | undefined;
|
|
1211
1211
|
/**
|
|
1212
1212
|
* Sample rate in Hz.
|
|
1213
1213
|
* @public
|
|
1214
1214
|
*/
|
|
1215
|
-
SampleRate?: number;
|
|
1215
|
+
SampleRate?: number | undefined;
|
|
1216
1216
|
}
|
|
1217
1217
|
/**
|
|
1218
1218
|
* Settings related to audio encoding. The settings in this group vary depending on the value that you choose for your audio codec.
|
|
@@ -1223,62 +1223,62 @@ export interface AudioCodecSettings {
|
|
|
1223
1223
|
* Required when you set Codec to the value AAC. The service accepts one of two mutually exclusive groups of AAC settings--VBR and CBR. To select one of these modes, set the value of Bitrate control mode to "VBR" or "CBR". In VBR mode, you control the audio quality with the setting VBR quality. In CBR mode, you use the setting Bitrate. Defaults and valid values depend on the rate control mode.
|
|
1224
1224
|
* @public
|
|
1225
1225
|
*/
|
|
1226
|
-
AacSettings?: AacSettings;
|
|
1226
|
+
AacSettings?: AacSettings | undefined;
|
|
1227
1227
|
/**
|
|
1228
1228
|
* Required when you set Codec to the value AC3.
|
|
1229
1229
|
* @public
|
|
1230
1230
|
*/
|
|
1231
|
-
Ac3Settings?: Ac3Settings;
|
|
1231
|
+
Ac3Settings?: Ac3Settings | undefined;
|
|
1232
1232
|
/**
|
|
1233
1233
|
* Required when you set Codec to the value AIFF.
|
|
1234
1234
|
* @public
|
|
1235
1235
|
*/
|
|
1236
|
-
AiffSettings?: AiffSettings;
|
|
1236
|
+
AiffSettings?: AiffSettings | undefined;
|
|
1237
1237
|
/**
|
|
1238
1238
|
* Choose the audio codec for this output. Note that the option Dolby Digital passthrough applies only to Dolby Digital and Dolby Digital Plus audio inputs. Make sure that you choose a codec that's supported with your output container: https://docs.aws.amazon.com/mediaconvert/latest/ug/reference-codecs-containers.html#reference-codecs-containers-output-audio For audio-only outputs, make sure that both your input audio codec and your output audio codec are supported for audio-only workflows. For more information, see: https://docs.aws.amazon.com/mediaconvert/latest/ug/reference-codecs-containers-input.html#reference-codecs-containers-input-audio-only and https://docs.aws.amazon.com/mediaconvert/latest/ug/reference-codecs-containers.html#audio-only-output
|
|
1239
1239
|
* @public
|
|
1240
1240
|
*/
|
|
1241
|
-
Codec?: AudioCodec;
|
|
1241
|
+
Codec?: AudioCodec | undefined;
|
|
1242
1242
|
/**
|
|
1243
1243
|
* Required when you set Codec to the value EAC3_ATMOS.
|
|
1244
1244
|
* @public
|
|
1245
1245
|
*/
|
|
1246
|
-
Eac3AtmosSettings?: Eac3AtmosSettings;
|
|
1246
|
+
Eac3AtmosSettings?: Eac3AtmosSettings | undefined;
|
|
1247
1247
|
/**
|
|
1248
1248
|
* Required when you set Codec to the value EAC3.
|
|
1249
1249
|
* @public
|
|
1250
1250
|
*/
|
|
1251
|
-
Eac3Settings?: Eac3Settings;
|
|
1251
|
+
Eac3Settings?: Eac3Settings | undefined;
|
|
1252
1252
|
/**
|
|
1253
1253
|
* Required when you set Codec, under AudioDescriptions>CodecSettings, to the value FLAC.
|
|
1254
1254
|
* @public
|
|
1255
1255
|
*/
|
|
1256
|
-
FlacSettings?: FlacSettings;
|
|
1256
|
+
FlacSettings?: FlacSettings | undefined;
|
|
1257
1257
|
/**
|
|
1258
1258
|
* Required when you set Codec to the value MP2.
|
|
1259
1259
|
* @public
|
|
1260
1260
|
*/
|
|
1261
|
-
Mp2Settings?: Mp2Settings;
|
|
1261
|
+
Mp2Settings?: Mp2Settings | undefined;
|
|
1262
1262
|
/**
|
|
1263
1263
|
* Required when you set Codec, under AudioDescriptions>CodecSettings, to the value MP3.
|
|
1264
1264
|
* @public
|
|
1265
1265
|
*/
|
|
1266
|
-
Mp3Settings?: Mp3Settings;
|
|
1266
|
+
Mp3Settings?: Mp3Settings | undefined;
|
|
1267
1267
|
/**
|
|
1268
1268
|
* Required when you set Codec, under AudioDescriptions>CodecSettings, to the value OPUS.
|
|
1269
1269
|
* @public
|
|
1270
1270
|
*/
|
|
1271
|
-
OpusSettings?: OpusSettings;
|
|
1271
|
+
OpusSettings?: OpusSettings | undefined;
|
|
1272
1272
|
/**
|
|
1273
1273
|
* Required when you set Codec, under AudioDescriptions>CodecSettings, to the value Vorbis.
|
|
1274
1274
|
* @public
|
|
1275
1275
|
*/
|
|
1276
|
-
VorbisSettings?: VorbisSettings;
|
|
1276
|
+
VorbisSettings?: VorbisSettings | undefined;
|
|
1277
1277
|
/**
|
|
1278
1278
|
* Required when you set Codec to the value WAV.
|
|
1279
1279
|
* @public
|
|
1280
1280
|
*/
|
|
1281
|
-
WavSettings?: WavSettings;
|
|
1281
|
+
WavSettings?: WavSettings | undefined;
|
|
1282
1282
|
}
|
|
1283
1283
|
/**
|
|
1284
1284
|
* @public
|
|
@@ -1503,12 +1503,12 @@ export interface OutputChannelMapping {
|
|
|
1503
1503
|
* Use this setting to specify your remix values when they are integers, such as -10, 0, or 4.
|
|
1504
1504
|
* @public
|
|
1505
1505
|
*/
|
|
1506
|
-
InputChannels?: number[];
|
|
1506
|
+
InputChannels?: number[] | undefined;
|
|
1507
1507
|
/**
|
|
1508
1508
|
* Use this setting to specify your remix values when they have a decimal component, such as -10.312, 0.08, or 4.9. MediaConvert rounds your remixing values to the nearest thousandth.
|
|
1509
1509
|
* @public
|
|
1510
1510
|
*/
|
|
1511
|
-
InputChannelsFineTune?: number[];
|
|
1511
|
+
InputChannelsFineTune?: number[] | undefined;
|
|
1512
1512
|
}
|
|
1513
1513
|
/**
|
|
1514
1514
|
* Channel mapping contains the group of fields that hold the remixing value for each channel, in dB. Specify remix values to indicate how much of the content from your input audio channel you want in your output audio channels. Each instance of the InputChannels or InputChannelsFineTune array specifies these values for one output channel. Use one instance of this array for each output channel. In the console, each array corresponds to a column in the graphical depiction of the mapping matrix. The rows of the graphical matrix correspond to input channels. Valid values are within the range from -60 (mute) through 6. A setting of 0 passes the input channel unchanged to the output channel (no attenuation or amplification). Use InputChannels or InputChannelsFineTune to specify your remix values. Don't use both.
|
|
@@ -1519,7 +1519,7 @@ export interface ChannelMapping {
|
|
|
1519
1519
|
* In your JSON job specification, include one child of OutputChannels for each audio channel that you want in your output. Each child should contain one instance of InputChannels or InputChannelsFineTune.
|
|
1520
1520
|
* @public
|
|
1521
1521
|
*/
|
|
1522
|
-
OutputChannels?: OutputChannelMapping[];
|
|
1522
|
+
OutputChannels?: OutputChannelMapping[] | undefined;
|
|
1523
1523
|
}
|
|
1524
1524
|
/**
|
|
1525
1525
|
* Use Manual audio remixing to adjust audio levels for each audio channel in each output of your job. With audio remixing, you can output more or fewer audio channels than your input audio source provides.
|
|
@@ -1530,27 +1530,27 @@ export interface RemixSettings {
|
|
|
1530
1530
|
* Optionally specify the channel in your input that contains your audio description audio signal. MediaConvert mixes your audio signal across all output channels, while reducing their volume according to your data stream. When you specify an audio description audio channel, you must also specify an audio description data channel. For more information about audio description signals, see the BBC WHP 198 and 051 white papers.
|
|
1531
1531
|
* @public
|
|
1532
1532
|
*/
|
|
1533
|
-
AudioDescriptionAudioChannel?: number;
|
|
1533
|
+
AudioDescriptionAudioChannel?: number | undefined;
|
|
1534
1534
|
/**
|
|
1535
1535
|
* Optionally specify the channel in your input that contains your audio description data stream. MediaConvert mixes your audio signal across all output channels, while reducing their volume according to your data stream. When you specify an audio description data channel, you must also specify an audio description audio channel. For more information about audio description signals, see the BBC WHP 198 and 051 white papers.
|
|
1536
1536
|
* @public
|
|
1537
1537
|
*/
|
|
1538
|
-
AudioDescriptionDataChannel?: number;
|
|
1538
|
+
AudioDescriptionDataChannel?: number | undefined;
|
|
1539
1539
|
/**
|
|
1540
1540
|
* Channel mapping contains the group of fields that hold the remixing value for each channel, in dB. Specify remix values to indicate how much of the content from your input audio channel you want in your output audio channels. Each instance of the InputChannels or InputChannelsFineTune array specifies these values for one output channel. Use one instance of this array for each output channel. In the console, each array corresponds to a column in the graphical depiction of the mapping matrix. The rows of the graphical matrix correspond to input channels. Valid values are within the range from -60 (mute) through 6. A setting of 0 passes the input channel unchanged to the output channel (no attenuation or amplification). Use InputChannels or InputChannelsFineTune to specify your remix values. Don't use both.
|
|
1541
1541
|
* @public
|
|
1542
1542
|
*/
|
|
1543
|
-
ChannelMapping?: ChannelMapping;
|
|
1543
|
+
ChannelMapping?: ChannelMapping | undefined;
|
|
1544
1544
|
/**
|
|
1545
1545
|
* Specify the number of audio channels from your input that you want to use in your output. With remixing, you might combine or split the data in these channels, so the number of channels in your final output might be different. If you are doing both input channel mapping and output channel mapping, the number of output channels in your input mapping must be the same as the number of input channels in your output mapping.
|
|
1546
1546
|
* @public
|
|
1547
1547
|
*/
|
|
1548
|
-
ChannelsIn?: number;
|
|
1548
|
+
ChannelsIn?: number | undefined;
|
|
1549
1549
|
/**
|
|
1550
1550
|
* Specify the number of channels in this output after remixing. Valid values: 1, 2, 4, 6, 8... 64. (1 and even numbers to 64.) If you are doing both input channel mapping and output channel mapping, the number of output channels in your input mapping must be the same as the number of input channels in your output mapping.
|
|
1551
1551
|
* @public
|
|
1552
1552
|
*/
|
|
1553
|
-
ChannelsOut?: number;
|
|
1553
|
+
ChannelsOut?: number | undefined;
|
|
1554
1554
|
}
|
|
1555
1555
|
/**
|
|
1556
1556
|
* Settings related to one audio tab on the MediaConvert console. In your job JSON, an instance of AudioDescription is equivalent to one audio tab in the console. Usually, one audio tab corresponds to one output audio track. Depending on how you set up your input audio selectors and whether you use audio selector groups, one audio tab can correspond to a group of output audio tracks.
|
|
@@ -1561,57 +1561,57 @@ export interface AudioDescription {
|
|
|
1561
1561
|
* Specify the QuickTime audio channel layout tags for the audio channels in this audio track. When you don't specify a value, MediaConvert labels your track as Center (C) by default. To use Audio layout tagging, your output must be in a QuickTime (MOV) container and your audio codec must be AAC, WAV, or AIFF.
|
|
1562
1562
|
* @public
|
|
1563
1563
|
*/
|
|
1564
|
-
AudioChannelTaggingSettings?: AudioChannelTaggingSettings;
|
|
1564
|
+
AudioChannelTaggingSettings?: AudioChannelTaggingSettings | undefined;
|
|
1565
1565
|
/**
|
|
1566
1566
|
* Advanced audio normalization settings. Ignore these settings unless you need to comply with a loudness standard.
|
|
1567
1567
|
* @public
|
|
1568
1568
|
*/
|
|
1569
|
-
AudioNormalizationSettings?: AudioNormalizationSettings;
|
|
1569
|
+
AudioNormalizationSettings?: AudioNormalizationSettings | undefined;
|
|
1570
1570
|
/**
|
|
1571
1571
|
* Specifies which audio data to use from each input. In the simplest case, specify an "Audio Selector":#inputs-audio_selector by name based on its order within each input. For example if you specify "Audio Selector 3", then the third audio selector will be used from each input. If an input does not have an "Audio Selector 3", then the audio selector marked as "default" in that input will be used. If there is no audio selector marked as "default", silence will be inserted for the duration of that input. Alternatively, an "Audio Selector Group":#inputs-audio_selector_group name may be specified, with similar default/silence behavior. If no audio_source_name is specified, then "Audio Selector 1" will be chosen automatically.
|
|
1572
1572
|
* @public
|
|
1573
1573
|
*/
|
|
1574
|
-
AudioSourceName?: string;
|
|
1574
|
+
AudioSourceName?: string | undefined;
|
|
1575
1575
|
/**
|
|
1576
1576
|
* Applies only if Follow Input Audio Type is unchecked (false). A number between 0 and 255. The following are defined in ISO-IEC 13818-1: 0 = Undefined, 1 = Clean Effects, 2 = Hearing Impaired, 3 = Visually Impaired Commentary, 4-255 = Reserved.
|
|
1577
1577
|
* @public
|
|
1578
1578
|
*/
|
|
1579
|
-
AudioType?: number;
|
|
1579
|
+
AudioType?: number | undefined;
|
|
1580
1580
|
/**
|
|
1581
1581
|
* When set to FOLLOW_INPUT, if the input contains an ISO 639 audio_type, then that value is passed through to the output. If the input contains no ISO 639 audio_type, the value in Audio Type is included in the output. Otherwise the value in Audio Type is included in the output. Note that this field and audioType are both ignored if audioDescriptionBroadcasterMix is set to BROADCASTER_MIXED_AD.
|
|
1582
1582
|
* @public
|
|
1583
1583
|
*/
|
|
1584
|
-
AudioTypeControl?: AudioTypeControl;
|
|
1584
|
+
AudioTypeControl?: AudioTypeControl | undefined;
|
|
1585
1585
|
/**
|
|
1586
1586
|
* Settings related to audio encoding. The settings in this group vary depending on the value that you choose for your audio codec.
|
|
1587
1587
|
* @public
|
|
1588
1588
|
*/
|
|
1589
|
-
CodecSettings?: AudioCodecSettings;
|
|
1589
|
+
CodecSettings?: AudioCodecSettings | undefined;
|
|
1590
1590
|
/**
|
|
1591
1591
|
* Specify the language for this audio output track. The service puts this language code into your output audio track when you set Language code control to Use configured. The service also uses your specified custom language code when you set Language code control to Follow input, but your input file doesn't specify a language code. For all outputs, you can use an ISO 639-2 or ISO 639-3 code. For streaming outputs, you can also use any other code in the full RFC-5646 specification. Streaming outputs are those that are in one of the following output groups: CMAF, DASH ISO, Apple HLS, or Microsoft Smooth Streaming.
|
|
1592
1592
|
* @public
|
|
1593
1593
|
*/
|
|
1594
|
-
CustomLanguageCode?: string;
|
|
1594
|
+
CustomLanguageCode?: string | undefined;
|
|
1595
1595
|
/**
|
|
1596
1596
|
* Indicates the language of the audio output track. The ISO 639 language specified in the 'Language Code' drop down will be used when 'Follow Input Language Code' is not selected or when 'Follow Input Language Code' is selected but there is no ISO 639 language code specified by the input.
|
|
1597
1597
|
* @public
|
|
1598
1598
|
*/
|
|
1599
|
-
LanguageCode?: LanguageCode;
|
|
1599
|
+
LanguageCode?: LanguageCode | undefined;
|
|
1600
1600
|
/**
|
|
1601
1601
|
* Specify which source for language code takes precedence for this audio track. When you choose Follow input, the service uses the language code from the input track if it's present. If there's no languge code on the input track, the service uses the code that you specify in the setting Language code. When you choose Use configured, the service uses the language code that you specify.
|
|
1602
1602
|
* @public
|
|
1603
1603
|
*/
|
|
1604
|
-
LanguageCodeControl?: AudioLanguageCodeControl;
|
|
1604
|
+
LanguageCodeControl?: AudioLanguageCodeControl | undefined;
|
|
1605
1605
|
/**
|
|
1606
1606
|
* Advanced audio remixing settings.
|
|
1607
1607
|
* @public
|
|
1608
1608
|
*/
|
|
1609
|
-
RemixSettings?: RemixSettings;
|
|
1609
|
+
RemixSettings?: RemixSettings | undefined;
|
|
1610
1610
|
/**
|
|
1611
1611
|
* Specify a label for this output audio stream. For example, "English", "Director commentary", or "track_2". For streaming outputs, MediaConvert passes this information into destination manifests for display on the end-viewer's player device. For outputs in other output groups, the service ignores this setting.
|
|
1612
1612
|
* @public
|
|
1613
1613
|
*/
|
|
1614
|
-
StreamName?: string;
|
|
1614
|
+
StreamName?: string | undefined;
|
|
1615
1615
|
}
|
|
1616
1616
|
/**
|
|
1617
1617
|
* Use Force include renditions to specify one or more resolutions to include your ABR stack. * (Recommended) To optimize automated ABR, specify as few resolutions as possible. * (Required) The number of resolutions that you specify must be equal to, or less than, the Max renditions setting. * If you specify a Min top rendition size rule, specify at least one resolution that is equal to, or greater than, Min top rendition size. * If you specify a Min bottom rendition size rule, only specify resolutions that are equal to, or greater than, Min bottom rendition size. * If you specify a Force include renditions rule, do not specify a separate rule for Allowed renditions. * Note: The ABR stack may include other resolutions that you do not specify here, depending on the Max renditions setting.
|
|
@@ -1622,12 +1622,12 @@ export interface ForceIncludeRenditionSize {
|
|
|
1622
1622
|
* Use Height to define the video resolution height, in pixels, for this rule.
|
|
1623
1623
|
* @public
|
|
1624
1624
|
*/
|
|
1625
|
-
Height?: number;
|
|
1625
|
+
Height?: number | undefined;
|
|
1626
1626
|
/**
|
|
1627
1627
|
* Use Width to define the video resolution width, in pixels, for this rule.
|
|
1628
1628
|
* @public
|
|
1629
1629
|
*/
|
|
1630
|
-
Width?: number;
|
|
1630
|
+
Width?: number | undefined;
|
|
1631
1631
|
}
|
|
1632
1632
|
/**
|
|
1633
1633
|
* Use Min bottom rendition size to specify a minimum size for the lowest resolution in your ABR stack. * The lowest resolution in your ABR stack will be equal to or greater than the value that you enter. For example: If you specify 640x360 the lowest resolution in your ABR stack will be equal to or greater than to 640x360. * If you specify a Min top rendition size rule, the value that you specify for Min bottom rendition size must be less than, or equal to, Min top rendition size.
|
|
@@ -1638,12 +1638,12 @@ export interface MinBottomRenditionSize {
|
|
|
1638
1638
|
* Use Height to define the video resolution height, in pixels, for this rule.
|
|
1639
1639
|
* @public
|
|
1640
1640
|
*/
|
|
1641
|
-
Height?: number;
|
|
1641
|
+
Height?: number | undefined;
|
|
1642
1642
|
/**
|
|
1643
1643
|
* Use Width to define the video resolution width, in pixels, for this rule.
|
|
1644
1644
|
* @public
|
|
1645
1645
|
*/
|
|
1646
|
-
Width?: number;
|
|
1646
|
+
Width?: number | undefined;
|
|
1647
1647
|
}
|
|
1648
1648
|
/**
|
|
1649
1649
|
* Use Min top rendition size to specify a minimum size for the highest resolution in your ABR stack. * The highest resolution in your ABR stack will be equal to or greater than the value that you enter. For example: If you specify 1280x720 the highest resolution in your ABR stack will be equal to or greater than 1280x720. * If you specify a value for Max resolution, the value that you specify for Min top rendition size must be less than, or equal to, Max resolution.
|
|
@@ -1654,12 +1654,12 @@ export interface MinTopRenditionSize {
|
|
|
1654
1654
|
* Use Height to define the video resolution height, in pixels, for this rule.
|
|
1655
1655
|
* @public
|
|
1656
1656
|
*/
|
|
1657
|
-
Height?: number;
|
|
1657
|
+
Height?: number | undefined;
|
|
1658
1658
|
/**
|
|
1659
1659
|
* Use Width to define the video resolution width, in pixels, for this rule.
|
|
1660
1660
|
* @public
|
|
1661
1661
|
*/
|
|
1662
|
-
Width?: number;
|
|
1662
|
+
Width?: number | undefined;
|
|
1663
1663
|
}
|
|
1664
1664
|
/**
|
|
1665
1665
|
* @public
|
|
@@ -1684,27 +1684,27 @@ export interface AutomatedAbrRule {
|
|
|
1684
1684
|
* When customer adds the allowed renditions rule for auto ABR ladder, they are required to add at leat one rendition to allowedRenditions list
|
|
1685
1685
|
* @public
|
|
1686
1686
|
*/
|
|
1687
|
-
AllowedRenditions?: AllowedRenditionSize[];
|
|
1687
|
+
AllowedRenditions?: AllowedRenditionSize[] | undefined;
|
|
1688
1688
|
/**
|
|
1689
1689
|
* When customer adds the force include renditions rule for auto ABR ladder, they are required to add at leat one rendition to forceIncludeRenditions list
|
|
1690
1690
|
* @public
|
|
1691
1691
|
*/
|
|
1692
|
-
ForceIncludeRenditions?: ForceIncludeRenditionSize[];
|
|
1692
|
+
ForceIncludeRenditions?: ForceIncludeRenditionSize[] | undefined;
|
|
1693
1693
|
/**
|
|
1694
1694
|
* Use Min bottom rendition size to specify a minimum size for the lowest resolution in your ABR stack. * The lowest resolution in your ABR stack will be equal to or greater than the value that you enter. For example: If you specify 640x360 the lowest resolution in your ABR stack will be equal to or greater than to 640x360. * If you specify a Min top rendition size rule, the value that you specify for Min bottom rendition size must be less than, or equal to, Min top rendition size.
|
|
1695
1695
|
* @public
|
|
1696
1696
|
*/
|
|
1697
|
-
MinBottomRenditionSize?: MinBottomRenditionSize;
|
|
1697
|
+
MinBottomRenditionSize?: MinBottomRenditionSize | undefined;
|
|
1698
1698
|
/**
|
|
1699
1699
|
* Use Min top rendition size to specify a minimum size for the highest resolution in your ABR stack. * The highest resolution in your ABR stack will be equal to or greater than the value that you enter. For example: If you specify 1280x720 the highest resolution in your ABR stack will be equal to or greater than 1280x720. * If you specify a value for Max resolution, the value that you specify for Min top rendition size must be less than, or equal to, Max resolution.
|
|
1700
1700
|
* @public
|
|
1701
1701
|
*/
|
|
1702
|
-
MinTopRenditionSize?: MinTopRenditionSize;
|
|
1702
|
+
MinTopRenditionSize?: MinTopRenditionSize | undefined;
|
|
1703
1703
|
/**
|
|
1704
1704
|
* Use Min top rendition size to specify a minimum size for the highest resolution in your ABR stack. * The highest resolution in your ABR stack will be equal to or greater than the value that you enter. For example: If you specify 1280x720 the highest resolution in your ABR stack will be equal to or greater than 1280x720. * If you specify a value for Max resolution, the value that you specify for Min top rendition size must be less than, or equal to, Max resolution. Use Min bottom rendition size to specify a minimum size for the lowest resolution in your ABR stack. * The lowest resolution in your ABR stack will be equal to or greater than the value that you enter. For example: If you specify 640x360 the lowest resolution in your ABR stack will be equal to or greater than to 640x360. * If you specify a Min top rendition size rule, the value that you specify for Min bottom rendition size must be less than, or equal to, Min top rendition size. Use Force include renditions to specify one or more resolutions to include your ABR stack. * (Recommended) To optimize automated ABR, specify as few resolutions as possible. * (Required) The number of resolutions that you specify must be equal to, or less than, the Max renditions setting. * If you specify a Min top rendition size rule, specify at least one resolution that is equal to, or greater than, Min top rendition size. * If you specify a Min bottom rendition size rule, only specify resolutions that are equal to, or greater than, Min bottom rendition size. * If you specify a Force include renditions rule, do not specify a separate rule for Allowed renditions. * Note: The ABR stack may include other resolutions that you do not specify here, depending on the Max renditions setting. Use Allowed renditions to specify a list of possible resolutions in your ABR stack. * (Required) The number of resolutions that you specify must be equal to, or greater than, the Max renditions setting. * MediaConvert will create an ABR stack exclusively from the list of resolutions that you specify. * Some resolutions in the Allowed renditions list may not be included, however you can force a resolution to be included by setting Required to ENABLED. * You must specify at least one resolution that is greater than or equal to any resolutions that you specify in Min top rendition size or Min bottom rendition size. * If you specify Allowed renditions, you must not specify a separate rule for Force include renditions.
|
|
1705
1705
|
* @public
|
|
1706
1706
|
*/
|
|
1707
|
-
Type?: RuleType;
|
|
1707
|
+
Type?: RuleType | undefined;
|
|
1708
1708
|
}
|
|
1709
1709
|
/**
|
|
1710
1710
|
* @public
|
|
@@ -1856,129 +1856,129 @@ export interface BurninDestinationSettings {
|
|
|
1856
1856
|
* Specify the alignment of your captions. If no explicit x_position is provided, setting alignment to centered will placethe captions at the bottom center of the output. Similarly, setting a left alignment willalign captions to the bottom left of the output. If x and y positions are given in conjunction with the alignment parameter, the font will be justified (either left or centered) relative to those coordinates.
|
|
1857
1857
|
* @public
|
|
1858
1858
|
*/
|
|
1859
|
-
Alignment?: BurninSubtitleAlignment;
|
|
1859
|
+
Alignment?: BurninSubtitleAlignment | undefined;
|
|
1860
1860
|
/**
|
|
1861
1861
|
* Ignore this setting unless Style passthrough is set to Enabled and Font color set to Black, Yellow, Red, Green, Blue, or Hex. Use Apply font color for additional font color controls. When you choose White text only, or leave blank, your font color setting only applies to white text in your input captions. For example, if your font color setting is Yellow, and your input captions have red and white text, your output captions will have red and yellow text. When you choose ALL_TEXT, your font color setting applies to all of your output captions text.
|
|
1862
1862
|
* @public
|
|
1863
1863
|
*/
|
|
1864
|
-
ApplyFontColor?: BurninSubtitleApplyFontColor;
|
|
1864
|
+
ApplyFontColor?: BurninSubtitleApplyFontColor | undefined;
|
|
1865
1865
|
/**
|
|
1866
1866
|
* Specify the color of the rectangle behind the captions. Leave background color blank and set Style passthrough to enabled to use the background color data from your input captions, if present.
|
|
1867
1867
|
* @public
|
|
1868
1868
|
*/
|
|
1869
|
-
BackgroundColor?: BurninSubtitleBackgroundColor;
|
|
1869
|
+
BackgroundColor?: BurninSubtitleBackgroundColor | undefined;
|
|
1870
1870
|
/**
|
|
1871
1871
|
* Specify the opacity of the background rectangle. Enter a value from 0 to 255, where 0 is transparent and 255 is opaque. If Style passthrough is set to enabled, leave blank to pass through the background style information in your input captions to your output captions. If Style passthrough is set to disabled, leave blank to use a value of 0 and remove all backgrounds from your output captions.
|
|
1872
1872
|
* @public
|
|
1873
1873
|
*/
|
|
1874
|
-
BackgroundOpacity?: number;
|
|
1874
|
+
BackgroundOpacity?: number | undefined;
|
|
1875
1875
|
/**
|
|
1876
1876
|
* Specify the font that you want the service to use for your burn in captions when your input captions specify a font that MediaConvert doesn't support. When you set Fallback font to best match, or leave blank, MediaConvert uses a supported font that most closely matches the font that your input captions specify. When there are multiple unsupported fonts in your input captions, MediaConvert matches each font with the supported font that matches best. When you explicitly choose a replacement font, MediaConvert uses that font to replace all unsupported fonts from your input.
|
|
1877
1877
|
* @public
|
|
1878
1878
|
*/
|
|
1879
|
-
FallbackFont?: BurninSubtitleFallbackFont;
|
|
1879
|
+
FallbackFont?: BurninSubtitleFallbackFont | undefined;
|
|
1880
1880
|
/**
|
|
1881
1881
|
* Specify the color of the burned-in captions text. Leave Font color blank and set Style passthrough to enabled to use the font color data from your input captions, if present.
|
|
1882
1882
|
* @public
|
|
1883
1883
|
*/
|
|
1884
|
-
FontColor?: BurninSubtitleFontColor;
|
|
1884
|
+
FontColor?: BurninSubtitleFontColor | undefined;
|
|
1885
1885
|
/**
|
|
1886
1886
|
* Specify a bold TrueType font file to use when rendering your output captions. Enter an S3, HTTP, or HTTPS URL. When you do, you must also separately specify a regular, an italic, and a bold italic font file.
|
|
1887
1887
|
* @public
|
|
1888
1888
|
*/
|
|
1889
|
-
FontFileBold?: string;
|
|
1889
|
+
FontFileBold?: string | undefined;
|
|
1890
1890
|
/**
|
|
1891
1891
|
* Specify a bold italic TrueType font file to use when rendering your output captions.
|
|
1892
1892
|
* Enter an S3, HTTP, or HTTPS URL.
|
|
1893
1893
|
* When you do, you must also separately specify a regular, a bold, and an italic font file.
|
|
1894
1894
|
* @public
|
|
1895
1895
|
*/
|
|
1896
|
-
FontFileBoldItalic?: string;
|
|
1896
|
+
FontFileBoldItalic?: string | undefined;
|
|
1897
1897
|
/**
|
|
1898
1898
|
* Specify an italic TrueType font file to use when rendering your output captions. Enter an S3, HTTP, or HTTPS URL. When you do, you must also separately specify a regular, a bold, and a bold italic font file.
|
|
1899
1899
|
* @public
|
|
1900
1900
|
*/
|
|
1901
|
-
FontFileItalic?: string;
|
|
1901
|
+
FontFileItalic?: string | undefined;
|
|
1902
1902
|
/**
|
|
1903
1903
|
* Specify a regular TrueType font file to use when rendering your output captions. Enter an S3, HTTP, or HTTPS URL. When you do, you must also separately specify a bold, an italic, and a bold italic font file.
|
|
1904
1904
|
* @public
|
|
1905
1905
|
*/
|
|
1906
|
-
FontFileRegular?: string;
|
|
1906
|
+
FontFileRegular?: string | undefined;
|
|
1907
1907
|
/**
|
|
1908
1908
|
* Specify the opacity of the burned-in captions. 255 is opaque; 0 is transparent.
|
|
1909
1909
|
* @public
|
|
1910
1910
|
*/
|
|
1911
|
-
FontOpacity?: number;
|
|
1911
|
+
FontOpacity?: number | undefined;
|
|
1912
1912
|
/**
|
|
1913
1913
|
* Specify the Font resolution in DPI (dots per inch).
|
|
1914
1914
|
* @public
|
|
1915
1915
|
*/
|
|
1916
|
-
FontResolution?: number;
|
|
1916
|
+
FontResolution?: number | undefined;
|
|
1917
1917
|
/**
|
|
1918
1918
|
* Set Font script to Automatically determined, or leave blank, to automatically determine the font script in your input captions. Otherwise, set to Simplified Chinese (HANS) or Traditional Chinese (HANT) if your input font script uses Simplified or Traditional Chinese.
|
|
1919
1919
|
* @public
|
|
1920
1920
|
*/
|
|
1921
|
-
FontScript?: FontScript;
|
|
1921
|
+
FontScript?: FontScript | undefined;
|
|
1922
1922
|
/**
|
|
1923
1923
|
* Specify the Font size in pixels. Must be a positive integer. Set to 0, or leave blank, for automatic font size.
|
|
1924
1924
|
* @public
|
|
1925
1925
|
*/
|
|
1926
|
-
FontSize?: number;
|
|
1926
|
+
FontSize?: number | undefined;
|
|
1927
1927
|
/**
|
|
1928
1928
|
* Ignore this setting unless your Font color is set to Hex. Enter either six or eight hexidecimal digits, representing red, green, and blue, with two optional extra digits for alpha. For example a value of 1122AABB is a red value of 0x11, a green value of 0x22, a blue value of 0xAA, and an alpha value of 0xBB.
|
|
1929
1929
|
* @public
|
|
1930
1930
|
*/
|
|
1931
|
-
HexFontColor?: string;
|
|
1931
|
+
HexFontColor?: string | undefined;
|
|
1932
1932
|
/**
|
|
1933
1933
|
* Specify font outline color. Leave Outline color blank and set Style passthrough to enabled to use the font outline color data from your input captions, if present.
|
|
1934
1934
|
* @public
|
|
1935
1935
|
*/
|
|
1936
|
-
OutlineColor?: BurninSubtitleOutlineColor;
|
|
1936
|
+
OutlineColor?: BurninSubtitleOutlineColor | undefined;
|
|
1937
1937
|
/**
|
|
1938
1938
|
* Specify the Outline size of the caption text, in pixels. Leave Outline size blank and set Style passthrough to enabled to use the outline size data from your input captions, if present.
|
|
1939
1939
|
* @public
|
|
1940
1940
|
*/
|
|
1941
|
-
OutlineSize?: number;
|
|
1941
|
+
OutlineSize?: number | undefined;
|
|
1942
1942
|
/**
|
|
1943
1943
|
* Specify the color of the shadow cast by the captions. Leave Shadow color blank and set Style passthrough to enabled to use the shadow color data from your input captions, if present.
|
|
1944
1944
|
* @public
|
|
1945
1945
|
*/
|
|
1946
|
-
ShadowColor?: BurninSubtitleShadowColor;
|
|
1946
|
+
ShadowColor?: BurninSubtitleShadowColor | undefined;
|
|
1947
1947
|
/**
|
|
1948
1948
|
* Specify the opacity of the shadow. Enter a value from 0 to 255, where 0 is transparent and 255 is opaque. If Style passthrough is set to Enabled, leave Shadow opacity blank to pass through the shadow style information in your input captions to your output captions. If Style passthrough is set to disabled, leave blank to use a value of 0 and remove all shadows from your output captions.
|
|
1949
1949
|
* @public
|
|
1950
1950
|
*/
|
|
1951
|
-
ShadowOpacity?: number;
|
|
1951
|
+
ShadowOpacity?: number | undefined;
|
|
1952
1952
|
/**
|
|
1953
1953
|
* Specify the horizontal offset of the shadow, relative to the captions in pixels. A value of -2 would result in a shadow offset 2 pixels to the left.
|
|
1954
1954
|
* @public
|
|
1955
1955
|
*/
|
|
1956
|
-
ShadowXOffset?: number;
|
|
1956
|
+
ShadowXOffset?: number | undefined;
|
|
1957
1957
|
/**
|
|
1958
1958
|
* Specify the vertical offset of the shadow relative to the captions in pixels. A value of -2 would result in a shadow offset 2 pixels above the text. Leave Shadow y-offset blank and set Style passthrough to enabled to use the shadow y-offset data from your input captions, if present.
|
|
1959
1959
|
* @public
|
|
1960
1960
|
*/
|
|
1961
|
-
ShadowYOffset?: number;
|
|
1961
|
+
ShadowYOffset?: number | undefined;
|
|
1962
1962
|
/**
|
|
1963
1963
|
* To use the available style, color, and position information from your input captions: Set Style passthrough to Enabled. Note that MediaConvert uses default settings for any missing style or position information in your input captions To ignore the style and position information from your input captions and use default settings: Leave blank or keep the default value, Disabled. Default settings include white text with black outlining, bottom-center positioning, and automatic sizing. Whether you set Style passthrough to enabled or not, you can also choose to manually override any of the individual style and position settings. You can also override any fonts by manually specifying custom font files.
|
|
1964
1964
|
* @public
|
|
1965
1965
|
*/
|
|
1966
|
-
StylePassthrough?: BurnInSubtitleStylePassthrough;
|
|
1966
|
+
StylePassthrough?: BurnInSubtitleStylePassthrough | undefined;
|
|
1967
1967
|
/**
|
|
1968
1968
|
* Specify whether the text spacing in your captions is set by the captions grid, or varies depending on letter width. Choose fixed grid to conform to the spacing specified in the captions file more accurately. Choose proportional to make the text easier to read for closed captions.
|
|
1969
1969
|
* @public
|
|
1970
1970
|
*/
|
|
1971
|
-
TeletextSpacing?: BurninSubtitleTeletextSpacing;
|
|
1971
|
+
TeletextSpacing?: BurninSubtitleTeletextSpacing | undefined;
|
|
1972
1972
|
/**
|
|
1973
1973
|
* Specify the horizontal position of the captions, relative to the left side of the output in pixels. A value of 10 would result in the captions starting 10 pixels from the left of the output. If no explicit x_position is provided, the horizontal caption position will be determined by the alignment parameter.
|
|
1974
1974
|
* @public
|
|
1975
1975
|
*/
|
|
1976
|
-
XPosition?: number;
|
|
1976
|
+
XPosition?: number | undefined;
|
|
1977
1977
|
/**
|
|
1978
1978
|
* Specify the vertical position of the captions, relative to the top of the output in pixels. A value of 10 would result in the captions starting 10 pixels from the top of the output. If no explicit y_position is provided, the caption will be positioned towards the bottom of the output.
|
|
1979
1979
|
* @public
|
|
1980
1980
|
*/
|
|
1981
|
-
YPosition?: number;
|
|
1981
|
+
YPosition?: number | undefined;
|
|
1982
1982
|
}
|
|
1983
1983
|
/**
|
|
1984
1984
|
* @public
|
|
@@ -2164,161 +2164,161 @@ export interface DvbSubDestinationSettings {
|
|
|
2164
2164
|
* Specify the alignment of your captions. If no explicit x_position is provided, setting alignment to centered will placethe captions at the bottom center of the output. Similarly, setting a left alignment willalign captions to the bottom left of the output. If x and y positions are given in conjunction with the alignment parameter, the font will be justified (either left or centered) relative to those coordinates. Within your job settings, all of your DVB-Sub settings must be identical.
|
|
2165
2165
|
* @public
|
|
2166
2166
|
*/
|
|
2167
|
-
Alignment?: DvbSubtitleAlignment;
|
|
2167
|
+
Alignment?: DvbSubtitleAlignment | undefined;
|
|
2168
2168
|
/**
|
|
2169
2169
|
* Ignore this setting unless Style Passthrough is set to Enabled and Font color set to Black, Yellow, Red, Green, Blue, or Hex. Use Apply font color for additional font color controls. When you choose White text only, or leave blank, your font color setting only applies to white text in your input captions. For example, if your font color setting is Yellow, and your input captions have red and white text, your output captions will have red and yellow text. When you choose ALL_TEXT, your font color setting applies to all of your output captions text.
|
|
2170
2170
|
* @public
|
|
2171
2171
|
*/
|
|
2172
|
-
ApplyFontColor?: DvbSubtitleApplyFontColor;
|
|
2172
|
+
ApplyFontColor?: DvbSubtitleApplyFontColor | undefined;
|
|
2173
2173
|
/**
|
|
2174
2174
|
* Specify the color of the rectangle behind the captions. Leave background color blank and set Style passthrough to enabled to use the background color data from your input captions, if present.
|
|
2175
2175
|
* @public
|
|
2176
2176
|
*/
|
|
2177
|
-
BackgroundColor?: DvbSubtitleBackgroundColor;
|
|
2177
|
+
BackgroundColor?: DvbSubtitleBackgroundColor | undefined;
|
|
2178
2178
|
/**
|
|
2179
2179
|
* Specify the opacity of the background rectangle. Enter a value from 0 to 255, where 0 is transparent and 255 is opaque. If Style passthrough is set to enabled, leave blank to pass through the background style information in your input captions to your output captions. If Style passthrough is set to disabled, leave blank to use a value of 0 and remove all backgrounds from your output captions. Within your job settings, all of your DVB-Sub settings must be identical.
|
|
2180
2180
|
* @public
|
|
2181
2181
|
*/
|
|
2182
|
-
BackgroundOpacity?: number;
|
|
2182
|
+
BackgroundOpacity?: number | undefined;
|
|
2183
2183
|
/**
|
|
2184
2184
|
* Specify how MediaConvert handles the display definition segment (DDS). To exclude the DDS from this set of captions: Keep the default, None. To include the DDS: Choose Specified. When you do, also specify the offset coordinates of the display window with DDS x-coordinate and DDS y-coordinate. To include the DDS, but not include display window data: Choose No display window. When you do, you can write position metadata to the page composition segment (PCS) with DDS x-coordinate and DDS y-coordinate. For video resolutions with a height of 576 pixels or less, MediaConvert doesn't include the DDS, regardless of the value you choose for DDS handling. All burn-in and DVB-Sub font settings must match.
|
|
2185
2185
|
* @public
|
|
2186
2186
|
*/
|
|
2187
|
-
DdsHandling?: DvbddsHandling;
|
|
2187
|
+
DdsHandling?: DvbddsHandling | undefined;
|
|
2188
2188
|
/**
|
|
2189
2189
|
* Use this setting, along with DDS y-coordinate, to specify the upper left corner of the display definition segment (DDS) display window. With this setting, specify the distance, in pixels, between the left side of the frame and the left side of the DDS display window. Keep the default value, 0, to have MediaConvert automatically choose this offset. Related setting: When you use this setting, you must set DDS handling to a value other than None. MediaConvert uses these values to determine whether to write page position data to the DDS or to the page composition segment. All burn-in and DVB-Sub font settings must match.
|
|
2190
2190
|
* @public
|
|
2191
2191
|
*/
|
|
2192
|
-
DdsXCoordinate?: number;
|
|
2192
|
+
DdsXCoordinate?: number | undefined;
|
|
2193
2193
|
/**
|
|
2194
2194
|
* Use this setting, along with DDS x-coordinate, to specify the upper left corner of the display definition segment (DDS) display window. With this setting, specify the distance, in pixels, between the top of the frame and the top of the DDS display window. Keep the default value, 0, to have MediaConvert automatically choose this offset. Related setting: When you use this setting, you must set DDS handling to a value other than None. MediaConvert uses these values to determine whether to write page position data to the DDS or to the page composition segment (PCS). All burn-in and DVB-Sub font settings must match.
|
|
2195
2195
|
* @public
|
|
2196
2196
|
*/
|
|
2197
|
-
DdsYCoordinate?: number;
|
|
2197
|
+
DdsYCoordinate?: number | undefined;
|
|
2198
2198
|
/**
|
|
2199
2199
|
* Specify the font that you want the service to use for your burn in captions when your input captions specify a font that MediaConvert doesn't support. When you set Fallback font to best match, or leave blank, MediaConvert uses a supported font that most closely matches the font that your input captions specify. When there are multiple unsupported fonts in your input captions, MediaConvert matches each font with the supported font that matches best. When you explicitly choose a replacement font, MediaConvert uses that font to replace all unsupported fonts from your input.
|
|
2200
2200
|
* @public
|
|
2201
2201
|
*/
|
|
2202
|
-
FallbackFont?: DvbSubSubtitleFallbackFont;
|
|
2202
|
+
FallbackFont?: DvbSubSubtitleFallbackFont | undefined;
|
|
2203
2203
|
/**
|
|
2204
2204
|
* Specify the color of the captions text. Leave Font color blank and set Style passthrough to enabled to use the font color data from your input captions, if present. Within your job settings, all of your DVB-Sub settings must be identical.
|
|
2205
2205
|
* @public
|
|
2206
2206
|
*/
|
|
2207
|
-
FontColor?: DvbSubtitleFontColor;
|
|
2207
|
+
FontColor?: DvbSubtitleFontColor | undefined;
|
|
2208
2208
|
/**
|
|
2209
2209
|
* Specify a bold TrueType font file to use when rendering your output captions. Enter an S3, HTTP, or HTTPS URL. When you do, you must also separately specify a regular, an italic, and a bold italic font file.
|
|
2210
2210
|
* @public
|
|
2211
2211
|
*/
|
|
2212
|
-
FontFileBold?: string;
|
|
2212
|
+
FontFileBold?: string | undefined;
|
|
2213
2213
|
/**
|
|
2214
2214
|
* Specify a bold italic TrueType font file to use when rendering your output captions.
|
|
2215
2215
|
* Enter an S3, HTTP, or HTTPS URL.
|
|
2216
2216
|
* When you do, you must also separately specify a regular, a bold, and an italic font file.
|
|
2217
2217
|
* @public
|
|
2218
2218
|
*/
|
|
2219
|
-
FontFileBoldItalic?: string;
|
|
2219
|
+
FontFileBoldItalic?: string | undefined;
|
|
2220
2220
|
/**
|
|
2221
2221
|
* Specify an italic TrueType font file to use when rendering your output captions. Enter an S3, HTTP, or HTTPS URL. When you do, you must also separately specify a regular, a bold, and a bold italic font file.
|
|
2222
2222
|
* @public
|
|
2223
2223
|
*/
|
|
2224
|
-
FontFileItalic?: string;
|
|
2224
|
+
FontFileItalic?: string | undefined;
|
|
2225
2225
|
/**
|
|
2226
2226
|
* Specify a regular TrueType font file to use when rendering your output captions. Enter an S3, HTTP, or HTTPS URL. When you do, you must also separately specify a bold, an italic, and a bold italic font file.
|
|
2227
2227
|
* @public
|
|
2228
2228
|
*/
|
|
2229
|
-
FontFileRegular?: string;
|
|
2229
|
+
FontFileRegular?: string | undefined;
|
|
2230
2230
|
/**
|
|
2231
2231
|
* Specify the opacity of the burned-in captions. 255 is opaque; 0 is transparent.
|
|
2232
2232
|
* Within your job settings, all of your DVB-Sub settings must be identical.
|
|
2233
2233
|
* @public
|
|
2234
2234
|
*/
|
|
2235
|
-
FontOpacity?: number;
|
|
2235
|
+
FontOpacity?: number | undefined;
|
|
2236
2236
|
/**
|
|
2237
2237
|
* Specify the Font resolution in DPI (dots per inch).
|
|
2238
2238
|
* Within your job settings, all of your DVB-Sub settings must be identical.
|
|
2239
2239
|
* @public
|
|
2240
2240
|
*/
|
|
2241
|
-
FontResolution?: number;
|
|
2241
|
+
FontResolution?: number | undefined;
|
|
2242
2242
|
/**
|
|
2243
2243
|
* Set Font script to Automatically determined, or leave blank, to automatically determine the font script in your input captions. Otherwise, set to Simplified Chinese (HANS) or Traditional Chinese (HANT) if your input font script uses Simplified or Traditional Chinese. Within your job settings, all of your DVB-Sub settings must be identical.
|
|
2244
2244
|
* @public
|
|
2245
2245
|
*/
|
|
2246
|
-
FontScript?: FontScript;
|
|
2246
|
+
FontScript?: FontScript | undefined;
|
|
2247
2247
|
/**
|
|
2248
2248
|
* Specify the Font size in pixels. Must be a positive integer. Set to 0, or leave blank, for automatic font size. Within your job settings, all of your DVB-Sub settings must be identical.
|
|
2249
2249
|
* @public
|
|
2250
2250
|
*/
|
|
2251
|
-
FontSize?: number;
|
|
2251
|
+
FontSize?: number | undefined;
|
|
2252
2252
|
/**
|
|
2253
2253
|
* Specify the height, in pixels, of this set of DVB-Sub captions. The default value is 576 pixels. Related setting: When you use this setting, you must set DDS handling to a value other than None. All burn-in and DVB-Sub font settings must match.
|
|
2254
2254
|
* @public
|
|
2255
2255
|
*/
|
|
2256
|
-
Height?: number;
|
|
2256
|
+
Height?: number | undefined;
|
|
2257
2257
|
/**
|
|
2258
2258
|
* Ignore this setting unless your Font color is set to Hex. Enter either six or eight hexidecimal digits, representing red, green, and blue, with two optional extra digits for alpha. For example a value of 1122AABB is a red value of 0x11, a green value of 0x22, a blue value of 0xAA, and an alpha value of 0xBB.
|
|
2259
2259
|
* @public
|
|
2260
2260
|
*/
|
|
2261
|
-
HexFontColor?: string;
|
|
2261
|
+
HexFontColor?: string | undefined;
|
|
2262
2262
|
/**
|
|
2263
2263
|
* Specify font outline color. Leave Outline color blank and set Style passthrough to enabled to use the font outline color data from your input captions, if present. Within your job settings, all of your DVB-Sub settings must be identical.
|
|
2264
2264
|
* @public
|
|
2265
2265
|
*/
|
|
2266
|
-
OutlineColor?: DvbSubtitleOutlineColor;
|
|
2266
|
+
OutlineColor?: DvbSubtitleOutlineColor | undefined;
|
|
2267
2267
|
/**
|
|
2268
2268
|
* Specify the Outline size of the caption text, in pixels. Leave Outline size blank and set Style passthrough to enabled to use the outline size data from your input captions, if present. Within your job settings, all of your DVB-Sub settings must be identical.
|
|
2269
2269
|
* @public
|
|
2270
2270
|
*/
|
|
2271
|
-
OutlineSize?: number;
|
|
2271
|
+
OutlineSize?: number | undefined;
|
|
2272
2272
|
/**
|
|
2273
2273
|
* Specify the color of the shadow cast by the captions. Leave Shadow color blank and set Style passthrough to enabled to use the shadow color data from your input captions, if present. Within your job settings, all of your DVB-Sub settings must be identical.
|
|
2274
2274
|
* @public
|
|
2275
2275
|
*/
|
|
2276
|
-
ShadowColor?: DvbSubtitleShadowColor;
|
|
2276
|
+
ShadowColor?: DvbSubtitleShadowColor | undefined;
|
|
2277
2277
|
/**
|
|
2278
2278
|
* Specify the opacity of the shadow. Enter a value from 0 to 255, where 0 is transparent and 255 is opaque. If Style passthrough is set to Enabled, leave Shadow opacity blank to pass through the shadow style information in your input captions to your output captions. If Style passthrough is set to disabled, leave blank to use a value of 0 and remove all shadows from your output captions. Within your job settings, all of your DVB-Sub settings must be identical.
|
|
2279
2279
|
* @public
|
|
2280
2280
|
*/
|
|
2281
|
-
ShadowOpacity?: number;
|
|
2281
|
+
ShadowOpacity?: number | undefined;
|
|
2282
2282
|
/**
|
|
2283
2283
|
* Specify the horizontal offset of the shadow, relative to the captions in pixels. A value of -2 would result in a shadow offset 2 pixels to the left. Within your job settings, all of your DVB-Sub settings must be identical.
|
|
2284
2284
|
* @public
|
|
2285
2285
|
*/
|
|
2286
|
-
ShadowXOffset?: number;
|
|
2286
|
+
ShadowXOffset?: number | undefined;
|
|
2287
2287
|
/**
|
|
2288
2288
|
* Specify the vertical offset of the shadow relative to the captions in pixels. A value of -2 would result in a shadow offset 2 pixels above the text. Leave Shadow y-offset blank and set Style passthrough to enabled to use the shadow y-offset data from your input captions, if present. Within your job settings, all of your DVB-Sub settings must be identical.
|
|
2289
2289
|
* @public
|
|
2290
2290
|
*/
|
|
2291
|
-
ShadowYOffset?: number;
|
|
2291
|
+
ShadowYOffset?: number | undefined;
|
|
2292
2292
|
/**
|
|
2293
2293
|
* To use the available style, color, and position information from your input captions: Set Style passthrough to Enabled. Note that MediaConvert uses default settings for any missing style or position information in your input captions To ignore the style and position information from your input captions and use default settings: Leave blank or keep the default value, Disabled. Default settings include white text with black outlining, bottom-center positioning, and automatic sizing. Whether you set Style passthrough to enabled or not, you can also choose to manually override any of the individual style and position settings. You can also override any fonts by manually specifying custom font files.
|
|
2294
2294
|
* @public
|
|
2295
2295
|
*/
|
|
2296
|
-
StylePassthrough?: DvbSubtitleStylePassthrough;
|
|
2296
|
+
StylePassthrough?: DvbSubtitleStylePassthrough | undefined;
|
|
2297
2297
|
/**
|
|
2298
2298
|
* Specify whether your DVB subtitles are standard or for hearing impaired. Choose hearing impaired if your subtitles include audio descriptions and dialogue. Choose standard if your subtitles include only dialogue.
|
|
2299
2299
|
* @public
|
|
2300
2300
|
*/
|
|
2301
|
-
SubtitlingType?: DvbSubtitlingType;
|
|
2301
|
+
SubtitlingType?: DvbSubtitlingType | undefined;
|
|
2302
2302
|
/**
|
|
2303
2303
|
* Specify whether the Text spacing in your captions is set by the captions grid, or varies depending on letter width. Choose fixed grid to conform to the spacing specified in the captions file more accurately. Choose proportional to make the text easier to read for closed captions. Within your job settings, all of your DVB-Sub settings must be identical.
|
|
2304
2304
|
* @public
|
|
2305
2305
|
*/
|
|
2306
|
-
TeletextSpacing?: DvbSubtitleTeletextSpacing;
|
|
2306
|
+
TeletextSpacing?: DvbSubtitleTeletextSpacing | undefined;
|
|
2307
2307
|
/**
|
|
2308
2308
|
* Specify the width, in pixels, of this set of DVB-Sub captions. The default value is 720 pixels. Related setting: When you use this setting, you must set DDS handling to a value other than None. All burn-in and DVB-Sub font settings must match.
|
|
2309
2309
|
* @public
|
|
2310
2310
|
*/
|
|
2311
|
-
Width?: number;
|
|
2311
|
+
Width?: number | undefined;
|
|
2312
2312
|
/**
|
|
2313
2313
|
* Specify the horizontal position of the captions, relative to the left side of the output in pixels. A value of 10 would result in the captions starting 10 pixels from the left of the output. If no explicit x_position is provided, the horizontal caption position will be determined by the alignment parameter. Within your job settings, all of your DVB-Sub settings must be identical.
|
|
2314
2314
|
* @public
|
|
2315
2315
|
*/
|
|
2316
|
-
XPosition?: number;
|
|
2316
|
+
XPosition?: number | undefined;
|
|
2317
2317
|
/**
|
|
2318
2318
|
* Specify the vertical position of the captions, relative to the top of the output in pixels. A value of 10 would result in the captions starting 10 pixels from the top of the output. If no explicit y_position is provided, the caption will be positioned towards the bottom of the output. Within your job settings, all of your DVB-Sub settings must be identical.
|
|
2319
2319
|
* @public
|
|
2320
2320
|
*/
|
|
2321
|
-
YPosition?: number;
|
|
2321
|
+
YPosition?: number | undefined;
|
|
2322
2322
|
}
|
|
2323
2323
|
/**
|
|
2324
2324
|
* Settings related to CEA/EIA-608 and CEA/EIA-708 (also called embedded or ancillary) captions. Set up embedded captions in the same output as your video. For more information, see https://docs.aws.amazon.com/mediaconvert/latest/ug/embedded-output-captions.html.
|
|
@@ -2329,12 +2329,12 @@ export interface EmbeddedDestinationSettings {
|
|
|
2329
2329
|
* Ignore this setting unless your input captions are SCC format and your output captions are embedded in the video stream. Specify a CC number for each captions channel in this output. If you have two channels, choose CC numbers that aren't in the same field. For example, choose 1 and 3. For more information, see https://docs.aws.amazon.com/console/mediaconvert/dual-scc-to-embedded.
|
|
2330
2330
|
* @public
|
|
2331
2331
|
*/
|
|
2332
|
-
Destination608ChannelNumber?: number;
|
|
2332
|
+
Destination608ChannelNumber?: number | undefined;
|
|
2333
2333
|
/**
|
|
2334
2334
|
* Ignore this setting unless your input captions are SCC format and you want both 608 and 708 captions embedded in your output stream. Optionally, specify the 708 service number for each output captions channel. Choose a different number for each channel. To use this setting, also set Force 608 to 708 upconvert to Upconvert in your input captions selector settings. If you choose to upconvert but don't specify a 708 service number, MediaConvert uses the number that you specify for CC channel number for the 708 service number. For more information, see https://docs.aws.amazon.com/console/mediaconvert/dual-scc-to-embedded.
|
|
2335
2335
|
* @public
|
|
2336
2336
|
*/
|
|
2337
|
-
Destination708ServiceNumber?: number;
|
|
2337
|
+
Destination708ServiceNumber?: number | undefined;
|
|
2338
2338
|
}
|
|
2339
2339
|
/**
|
|
2340
2340
|
* @public
|
|
@@ -2369,12 +2369,12 @@ export interface ImscDestinationSettings {
|
|
|
2369
2369
|
* If the IMSC captions track is intended to provide accessibility for people who are deaf or hard of hearing: Set Accessibility subtitles to Enabled. When you do, MediaConvert adds accessibility attributes to your output HLS or DASH manifest. For HLS manifests, MediaConvert adds the following accessibility attributes under EXT-X-MEDIA for this track: CHARACTERISTICS="public.accessibility.describes-spoken-dialog,public.accessibility.describes-music-and-sound" and AUTOSELECT="YES". For DASH manifests, MediaConvert adds the following in the adaptation set for this track: <Accessibility schemeIdUri="urn:mpeg:dash:role:2011" value="caption"/>. If the captions track is not intended to provide such accessibility: Keep the default value, Disabled. When you do, for DASH manifests, MediaConvert instead adds the following in the adaptation set for this track: <Role schemeIDUri="urn:mpeg:dash:role:2011" value="subtitle"/>.
|
|
2370
2370
|
* @public
|
|
2371
2371
|
*/
|
|
2372
|
-
Accessibility?: ImscAccessibilitySubs;
|
|
2372
|
+
Accessibility?: ImscAccessibilitySubs | undefined;
|
|
2373
2373
|
/**
|
|
2374
2374
|
* Keep this setting enabled to have MediaConvert use the font style and position information from the captions source in the output. This option is available only when your input captions are IMSC, SMPTE-TT, or TTML. Disable this setting for simplified output captions.
|
|
2375
2375
|
* @public
|
|
2376
2376
|
*/
|
|
2377
|
-
StylePassthrough?: ImscStylePassthrough;
|
|
2377
|
+
StylePassthrough?: ImscStylePassthrough | undefined;
|
|
2378
2378
|
}
|
|
2379
2379
|
/**
|
|
2380
2380
|
* @public
|
|
@@ -2400,7 +2400,7 @@ export interface SccDestinationSettings {
|
|
|
2400
2400
|
* Set Framerate to make sure that the captions and the video are synchronized in the output. Specify a frame rate that matches the frame rate of the associated video. If the video frame rate is 29.97, choose 29.97 dropframe only if the video has video_insertion=true and drop_frame_timecode=true; otherwise, choose 29.97 non-dropframe.
|
|
2401
2401
|
* @public
|
|
2402
2402
|
*/
|
|
2403
|
-
Framerate?: SccDestinationFramerate;
|
|
2403
|
+
Framerate?: SccDestinationFramerate | undefined;
|
|
2404
2404
|
}
|
|
2405
2405
|
/**
|
|
2406
2406
|
* @public
|
|
@@ -2423,7 +2423,7 @@ export interface SrtDestinationSettings {
|
|
|
2423
2423
|
* Set Style passthrough to ENABLED to use the available style, color, and position information from your input captions. MediaConvert uses default settings for any missing style and position information in your input captions. Set Style passthrough to DISABLED, or leave blank, to ignore the style and position information from your input captions and use simplified output captions.
|
|
2424
2424
|
* @public
|
|
2425
2425
|
*/
|
|
2426
|
-
StylePassthrough?: SrtStylePassthrough;
|
|
2426
|
+
StylePassthrough?: SrtStylePassthrough | undefined;
|
|
2427
2427
|
}
|
|
2428
2428
|
/**
|
|
2429
2429
|
* @public
|
|
@@ -2449,12 +2449,12 @@ export interface TeletextDestinationSettings {
|
|
|
2449
2449
|
* Set pageNumber to the Teletext page number for the destination captions for this output. This value must be a three-digit hexadecimal string; strings ending in -FF are invalid. If you are passing through the entire set of Teletext data, do not use this field.
|
|
2450
2450
|
* @public
|
|
2451
2451
|
*/
|
|
2452
|
-
PageNumber?: string;
|
|
2452
|
+
PageNumber?: string | undefined;
|
|
2453
2453
|
/**
|
|
2454
2454
|
* Specify the page types for this Teletext page. If you don't specify a value here, the service sets the page type to the default value Subtitle. If you pass through the entire set of Teletext data, don't use this field. When you pass through a set of Teletext pages, your output has the same page types as your input.
|
|
2455
2455
|
* @public
|
|
2456
2456
|
*/
|
|
2457
|
-
PageTypes?: TeletextPageType[];
|
|
2457
|
+
PageTypes?: TeletextPageType[] | undefined;
|
|
2458
2458
|
}
|
|
2459
2459
|
/**
|
|
2460
2460
|
* @public
|
|
@@ -2477,7 +2477,7 @@ export interface TtmlDestinationSettings {
|
|
|
2477
2477
|
* Pass through style and position information from a TTML-like input source (TTML, IMSC, SMPTE-TT) to the TTML output.
|
|
2478
2478
|
* @public
|
|
2479
2479
|
*/
|
|
2480
|
-
StylePassthrough?: TtmlStylePassthrough;
|
|
2480
|
+
StylePassthrough?: TtmlStylePassthrough | undefined;
|
|
2481
2481
|
}
|
|
2482
2482
|
/**
|
|
2483
2483
|
* @public
|
|
@@ -2513,12 +2513,12 @@ export interface WebvttDestinationSettings {
|
|
|
2513
2513
|
* If the WebVTT captions track is intended to provide accessibility for people who are deaf or hard of hearing: Set Accessibility subtitles to Enabled. When you do, MediaConvert adds accessibility attributes to your output HLS or DASH manifest. For HLS manifests, MediaConvert adds the following accessibility attributes under EXT-X-MEDIA for this track: CHARACTERISTICS="public.accessibility.describes-spoken-dialog,public.accessibility.describes-music-and-sound" and AUTOSELECT="YES". For DASH manifests, MediaConvert adds the following in the adaptation set for this track: <Accessibility schemeIdUri="urn:mpeg:dash:role:2011" value="caption"/>. If the captions track is not intended to provide such accessibility: Keep the default value, Disabled. When you do, for DASH manifests, MediaConvert instead adds the following in the adaptation set for this track: <Role schemeIDUri="urn:mpeg:dash:role:2011" value="subtitle"/>.
|
|
2514
2514
|
* @public
|
|
2515
2515
|
*/
|
|
2516
|
-
Accessibility?: WebvttAccessibilitySubs;
|
|
2516
|
+
Accessibility?: WebvttAccessibilitySubs | undefined;
|
|
2517
2517
|
/**
|
|
2518
2518
|
* To use the available style, color, and position information from your input captions: Set Style passthrough to Enabled. MediaConvert uses default settings when style and position information is missing from your input captions. To recreate the input captions exactly: Set Style passthrough to Strict. MediaConvert automatically applies timing adjustments, including adjustments for frame rate conversion, ad avails, and input clipping. Your input captions format must be WebVTT. To ignore the style and position information from your input captions and use simplified output captions: Set Style passthrough to Disabled, or leave blank.
|
|
2519
2519
|
* @public
|
|
2520
2520
|
*/
|
|
2521
|
-
StylePassthrough?: WebvttStylePassthrough;
|
|
2521
|
+
StylePassthrough?: WebvttStylePassthrough | undefined;
|
|
2522
2522
|
}
|
|
2523
2523
|
/**
|
|
2524
2524
|
* Settings related to one captions tab on the MediaConvert console. Usually, one captions tab corresponds to one output captions track. Depending on your output captions format, one tab might correspond to a set of output captions tracks. For more information, see https://docs.aws.amazon.com/mediaconvert/latest/ug/including-captions.html.
|
|
@@ -2529,52 +2529,52 @@ export interface CaptionDestinationSettings {
|
|
|
2529
2529
|
* Burn-in is a captions delivery method, rather than a captions format. Burn-in writes the captions directly on your video frames, replacing pixels of video content with the captions. Set up burn-in captions in the same output as your video. For more information, see https://docs.aws.amazon.com/mediaconvert/latest/ug/burn-in-output-captions.html.
|
|
2530
2530
|
* @public
|
|
2531
2531
|
*/
|
|
2532
|
-
BurninDestinationSettings?: BurninDestinationSettings;
|
|
2532
|
+
BurninDestinationSettings?: BurninDestinationSettings | undefined;
|
|
2533
2533
|
/**
|
|
2534
2534
|
* Specify the format for this set of captions on this output. The default format is embedded without SCTE-20. Note that your choice of video output container constrains your choice of output captions format. For more information, see https://docs.aws.amazon.com/mediaconvert/latest/ug/captions-support-tables.html. If you are using SCTE-20 and you want to create an output that complies with the SCTE-43 spec, choose SCTE-20 plus embedded. To create a non-compliant output where the embedded captions come first, choose Embedded plus SCTE-20.
|
|
2535
2535
|
* @public
|
|
2536
2536
|
*/
|
|
2537
|
-
DestinationType?: CaptionDestinationType;
|
|
2537
|
+
DestinationType?: CaptionDestinationType | undefined;
|
|
2538
2538
|
/**
|
|
2539
2539
|
* Settings related to DVB-Sub captions. Set up DVB-Sub captions in the same output as your video. For more information, see https://docs.aws.amazon.com/mediaconvert/latest/ug/dvb-sub-output-captions.html.
|
|
2540
2540
|
* @public
|
|
2541
2541
|
*/
|
|
2542
|
-
DvbSubDestinationSettings?: DvbSubDestinationSettings;
|
|
2542
|
+
DvbSubDestinationSettings?: DvbSubDestinationSettings | undefined;
|
|
2543
2543
|
/**
|
|
2544
2544
|
* Settings related to CEA/EIA-608 and CEA/EIA-708 (also called embedded or ancillary) captions. Set up embedded captions in the same output as your video. For more information, see https://docs.aws.amazon.com/mediaconvert/latest/ug/embedded-output-captions.html.
|
|
2545
2545
|
* @public
|
|
2546
2546
|
*/
|
|
2547
|
-
EmbeddedDestinationSettings?: EmbeddedDestinationSettings;
|
|
2547
|
+
EmbeddedDestinationSettings?: EmbeddedDestinationSettings | undefined;
|
|
2548
2548
|
/**
|
|
2549
2549
|
* Settings related to IMSC captions. IMSC is a sidecar format that holds captions in a file that is separate from the video container. Set up sidecar captions in the same output group, but different output from your video. For more information, see https://docs.aws.amazon.com/mediaconvert/latest/ug/ttml-and-webvtt-output-captions.html.
|
|
2550
2550
|
* @public
|
|
2551
2551
|
*/
|
|
2552
|
-
ImscDestinationSettings?: ImscDestinationSettings;
|
|
2552
|
+
ImscDestinationSettings?: ImscDestinationSettings | undefined;
|
|
2553
2553
|
/**
|
|
2554
2554
|
* Settings related to SCC captions. SCC is a sidecar format that holds captions in a file that is separate from the video container. Set up sidecar captions in the same output group, but different output from your video. For more information, see https://docs.aws.amazon.com/mediaconvert/latest/ug/scc-srt-output-captions.html.
|
|
2555
2555
|
* @public
|
|
2556
2556
|
*/
|
|
2557
|
-
SccDestinationSettings?: SccDestinationSettings;
|
|
2557
|
+
SccDestinationSettings?: SccDestinationSettings | undefined;
|
|
2558
2558
|
/**
|
|
2559
2559
|
* Settings related to SRT captions. SRT is a sidecar format that holds captions in a file that is separate from the video container. Set up sidecar captions in the same output group, but different output from your video.
|
|
2560
2560
|
* @public
|
|
2561
2561
|
*/
|
|
2562
|
-
SrtDestinationSettings?: SrtDestinationSettings;
|
|
2562
|
+
SrtDestinationSettings?: SrtDestinationSettings | undefined;
|
|
2563
2563
|
/**
|
|
2564
2564
|
* Settings related to teletext captions. Set up teletext captions in the same output as your video. For more information, see https://docs.aws.amazon.com/mediaconvert/latest/ug/teletext-output-captions.html.
|
|
2565
2565
|
* @public
|
|
2566
2566
|
*/
|
|
2567
|
-
TeletextDestinationSettings?: TeletextDestinationSettings;
|
|
2567
|
+
TeletextDestinationSettings?: TeletextDestinationSettings | undefined;
|
|
2568
2568
|
/**
|
|
2569
2569
|
* Settings related to TTML captions. TTML is a sidecar format that holds captions in a file that is separate from the video container. Set up sidecar captions in the same output group, but different output from your video. For more information, see https://docs.aws.amazon.com/mediaconvert/latest/ug/ttml-and-webvtt-output-captions.html.
|
|
2570
2570
|
* @public
|
|
2571
2571
|
*/
|
|
2572
|
-
TtmlDestinationSettings?: TtmlDestinationSettings;
|
|
2572
|
+
TtmlDestinationSettings?: TtmlDestinationSettings | undefined;
|
|
2573
2573
|
/**
|
|
2574
2574
|
* Settings related to WebVTT captions. WebVTT is a sidecar format that holds captions in a file that is separate from the video container. Set up sidecar captions in the same output group, but different output from your video. For more information, see https://docs.aws.amazon.com/mediaconvert/latest/ug/ttml-and-webvtt-output-captions.html.
|
|
2575
2575
|
* @public
|
|
2576
2576
|
*/
|
|
2577
|
-
WebvttDestinationSettings?: WebvttDestinationSettings;
|
|
2577
|
+
WebvttDestinationSettings?: WebvttDestinationSettings | undefined;
|
|
2578
2578
|
}
|
|
2579
2579
|
/**
|
|
2580
2580
|
* This object holds groups of settings related to captions for one output. For each output that has captions, include one instance of CaptionDescriptions.
|
|
@@ -2585,27 +2585,27 @@ export interface CaptionDescription {
|
|
|
2585
2585
|
* Specifies which "Caption Selector":#inputs-caption_selector to use from each input when generating captions. The name should be of the format "Caption Selector <N>", which denotes that the Nth Caption Selector will be used from each input.
|
|
2586
2586
|
* @public
|
|
2587
2587
|
*/
|
|
2588
|
-
CaptionSelectorName?: string;
|
|
2588
|
+
CaptionSelectorName?: string | undefined;
|
|
2589
2589
|
/**
|
|
2590
2590
|
* Specify the language for this captions output track. For most captions output formats, the encoder puts this language information in the output captions metadata. If your output captions format is DVB-Sub or Burn in, the encoder uses this language information when automatically selecting the font script for rendering the captions text. For all outputs, you can use an ISO 639-2 or ISO 639-3 code. For streaming outputs, you can also use any other code in the full RFC-5646 specification. Streaming outputs are those that are in one of the following output groups: CMAF, DASH ISO, Apple HLS, or Microsoft Smooth Streaming.
|
|
2591
2591
|
* @public
|
|
2592
2592
|
*/
|
|
2593
|
-
CustomLanguageCode?: string;
|
|
2593
|
+
CustomLanguageCode?: string | undefined;
|
|
2594
2594
|
/**
|
|
2595
2595
|
* Settings related to one captions tab on the MediaConvert console. Usually, one captions tab corresponds to one output captions track. Depending on your output captions format, one tab might correspond to a set of output captions tracks. For more information, see https://docs.aws.amazon.com/mediaconvert/latest/ug/including-captions.html.
|
|
2596
2596
|
* @public
|
|
2597
2597
|
*/
|
|
2598
|
-
DestinationSettings?: CaptionDestinationSettings;
|
|
2598
|
+
DestinationSettings?: CaptionDestinationSettings | undefined;
|
|
2599
2599
|
/**
|
|
2600
2600
|
* Specify the language of this captions output track. For most captions output formats, the encoder puts this language information in the output captions metadata. If your output captions format is DVB-Sub or Burn in, the encoder uses this language information to choose the font language for rendering the captions text.
|
|
2601
2601
|
* @public
|
|
2602
2602
|
*/
|
|
2603
|
-
LanguageCode?: LanguageCode;
|
|
2603
|
+
LanguageCode?: LanguageCode | undefined;
|
|
2604
2604
|
/**
|
|
2605
2605
|
* Specify a label for this set of output captions. For example, "English", "Director commentary", or "track_2". For streaming outputs, MediaConvert passes this information into destination manifests for display on the end-viewer's player device. For outputs in other output groups, the service ignores this setting.
|
|
2606
2606
|
* @public
|
|
2607
2607
|
*/
|
|
2608
|
-
LanguageDescription?: string;
|
|
2608
|
+
LanguageDescription?: string | undefined;
|
|
2609
2609
|
}
|
|
2610
2610
|
/**
|
|
2611
2611
|
* Caption Description for preset
|
|
@@ -2616,22 +2616,22 @@ export interface CaptionDescriptionPreset {
|
|
|
2616
2616
|
* Specify the language for this captions output track. For most captions output formats, the encoder puts this language information in the output captions metadata. If your output captions format is DVB-Sub or Burn in, the encoder uses this language information when automatically selecting the font script for rendering the captions text. For all outputs, you can use an ISO 639-2 or ISO 639-3 code. For streaming outputs, you can also use any other code in the full RFC-5646 specification. Streaming outputs are those that are in one of the following output groups: CMAF, DASH ISO, Apple HLS, or Microsoft Smooth Streaming.
|
|
2617
2617
|
* @public
|
|
2618
2618
|
*/
|
|
2619
|
-
CustomLanguageCode?: string;
|
|
2619
|
+
CustomLanguageCode?: string | undefined;
|
|
2620
2620
|
/**
|
|
2621
2621
|
* Settings related to one captions tab on the MediaConvert console. Usually, one captions tab corresponds to one output captions track. Depending on your output captions format, one tab might correspond to a set of output captions tracks. For more information, see https://docs.aws.amazon.com/mediaconvert/latest/ug/including-captions.html.
|
|
2622
2622
|
* @public
|
|
2623
2623
|
*/
|
|
2624
|
-
DestinationSettings?: CaptionDestinationSettings;
|
|
2624
|
+
DestinationSettings?: CaptionDestinationSettings | undefined;
|
|
2625
2625
|
/**
|
|
2626
2626
|
* Specify the language of this captions output track. For most captions output formats, the encoder puts this language information in the output captions metadata. If your output captions format is DVB-Sub or Burn in, the encoder uses this language information to choose the font language for rendering the captions text.
|
|
2627
2627
|
* @public
|
|
2628
2628
|
*/
|
|
2629
|
-
LanguageCode?: LanguageCode;
|
|
2629
|
+
LanguageCode?: LanguageCode | undefined;
|
|
2630
2630
|
/**
|
|
2631
2631
|
* Specify a label for this set of output captions. For example, "English", "Director commentary", or "track_2". For streaming outputs, MediaConvert passes this information into destination manifests for display on the end-viewer's player device. For outputs in other output groups, the service ignores this setting.
|
|
2632
2632
|
* @public
|
|
2633
2633
|
*/
|
|
2634
|
-
LanguageDescription?: string;
|
|
2634
|
+
LanguageDescription?: string | undefined;
|
|
2635
2635
|
}
|
|
2636
2636
|
/**
|
|
2637
2637
|
* Specify the details for each pair of HLS and DASH additional manifests that you want the service to generate for this CMAF output group. Each pair of manifests can reference a different subset of outputs in the group.
|
|
@@ -2642,12 +2642,12 @@ export interface CmafAdditionalManifest {
|
|
|
2642
2642
|
* Specify a name modifier that the service adds to the name of this manifest to make it different from the file names of the other main manifests in the output group. For example, say that the default main manifest for your HLS group is film-name.m3u8. If you enter "-no-premium" for this setting, then the file name the service generates for this top-level manifest is film-name-no-premium.m3u8. For HLS output groups, specify a manifestNameModifier that is different from the nameModifier of the output. The service uses the output name modifier to create unique names for the individual variant manifests.
|
|
2643
2643
|
* @public
|
|
2644
2644
|
*/
|
|
2645
|
-
ManifestNameModifier?: string;
|
|
2645
|
+
ManifestNameModifier?: string | undefined;
|
|
2646
2646
|
/**
|
|
2647
2647
|
* Specify the outputs that you want this additional top-level manifest to reference.
|
|
2648
2648
|
* @public
|
|
2649
2649
|
*/
|
|
2650
|
-
SelectedOutputs?: string[];
|
|
2650
|
+
SelectedOutputs?: string[] | undefined;
|
|
2651
2651
|
}
|
|
2652
2652
|
/**
|
|
2653
2653
|
* @public
|
|
@@ -2676,27 +2676,27 @@ export interface ColorConversion3DLUTSetting {
|
|
|
2676
2676
|
* Specify the input file S3, HTTP, or HTTPS URL for your 3D LUT .cube file. Note that MediaConvert accepts 3D LUT files up to 8MB in size.
|
|
2677
2677
|
* @public
|
|
2678
2678
|
*/
|
|
2679
|
-
FileInput?: string;
|
|
2679
|
+
FileInput?: string | undefined;
|
|
2680
2680
|
/**
|
|
2681
2681
|
* Specify which inputs use this 3D LUT, according to their color space.
|
|
2682
2682
|
* @public
|
|
2683
2683
|
*/
|
|
2684
|
-
InputColorSpace?: ColorSpace;
|
|
2684
|
+
InputColorSpace?: ColorSpace | undefined;
|
|
2685
2685
|
/**
|
|
2686
2686
|
* Specify which inputs use this 3D LUT, according to their luminance. To apply this 3D LUT to HDR10 or P3D65 (HDR) inputs with a specific mastering luminance: Enter an integer from 0 to 2147483647, corresponding to the input's Maximum luminance value. To apply this 3D LUT to any input regardless of its luminance: Leave blank, or enter 0.
|
|
2687
2687
|
* @public
|
|
2688
2688
|
*/
|
|
2689
|
-
InputMasteringLuminance?: number;
|
|
2689
|
+
InputMasteringLuminance?: number | undefined;
|
|
2690
2690
|
/**
|
|
2691
2691
|
* Specify which outputs use this 3D LUT, according to their color space.
|
|
2692
2692
|
* @public
|
|
2693
2693
|
*/
|
|
2694
|
-
OutputColorSpace?: ColorSpace;
|
|
2694
|
+
OutputColorSpace?: ColorSpace | undefined;
|
|
2695
2695
|
/**
|
|
2696
2696
|
* Specify which outputs use this 3D LUT, according to their luminance. To apply this 3D LUT to HDR10 or P3D65 (HDR) outputs with a specific luminance: Enter an integer from 0 to 2147483647, corresponding to the output's luminance. To apply this 3D LUT to any output regardless of its luminance: Leave blank, or enter 0.
|
|
2697
2697
|
* @public
|
|
2698
2698
|
*/
|
|
2699
|
-
OutputMasteringLuminance?: number;
|
|
2699
|
+
OutputMasteringLuminance?: number | undefined;
|
|
2700
2700
|
}
|
|
2701
2701
|
/**
|
|
2702
2702
|
* Specify the details for each additional DASH manifest that you want the service to generate for this output group. Each manifest can reference a different subset of outputs in the group.
|
|
@@ -2707,12 +2707,12 @@ export interface DashAdditionalManifest {
|
|
|
2707
2707
|
* Specify a name modifier that the service adds to the name of this manifest to make it different from the file names of the other main manifests in the output group. For example, say that the default main manifest for your DASH group is film-name.mpd. If you enter "-no-premium" for this setting, then the file name the service generates for this top-level manifest is film-name-no-premium.mpd.
|
|
2708
2708
|
* @public
|
|
2709
2709
|
*/
|
|
2710
|
-
ManifestNameModifier?: string;
|
|
2710
|
+
ManifestNameModifier?: string | undefined;
|
|
2711
2711
|
/**
|
|
2712
2712
|
* Specify the outputs that you want this additional top-level manifest to reference.
|
|
2713
2713
|
* @public
|
|
2714
2714
|
*/
|
|
2715
|
-
SelectedOutputs?: string[];
|
|
2715
|
+
SelectedOutputs?: string[] | undefined;
|
|
2716
2716
|
}
|
|
2717
2717
|
/**
|
|
2718
2718
|
* Describes an account-specific API endpoint.
|
|
@@ -2723,7 +2723,7 @@ export interface Endpoint {
|
|
|
2723
2723
|
* URL of endpoint
|
|
2724
2724
|
* @public
|
|
2725
2725
|
*/
|
|
2726
|
-
Url?: string;
|
|
2726
|
+
Url?: string | undefined;
|
|
2727
2727
|
}
|
|
2728
2728
|
/**
|
|
2729
2729
|
* Specify the details for each additional HLS manifest that you want the service to generate for this output group. Each manifest can reference a different subset of outputs in the group.
|
|
@@ -2734,12 +2734,12 @@ export interface HlsAdditionalManifest {
|
|
|
2734
2734
|
* Specify a name modifier that the service adds to the name of this manifest to make it different from the file names of the other main manifests in the output group. For example, say that the default main manifest for your HLS group is film-name.m3u8. If you enter "-no-premium" for this setting, then the file name the service generates for this top-level manifest is film-name-no-premium.m3u8. For HLS output groups, specify a manifestNameModifier that is different from the nameModifier of the output. The service uses the output name modifier to create unique names for the individual variant manifests.
|
|
2735
2735
|
* @public
|
|
2736
2736
|
*/
|
|
2737
|
-
ManifestNameModifier?: string;
|
|
2737
|
+
ManifestNameModifier?: string | undefined;
|
|
2738
2738
|
/**
|
|
2739
2739
|
* Specify the outputs that you want this additional top-level manifest to reference.
|
|
2740
2740
|
* @public
|
|
2741
2741
|
*/
|
|
2742
|
-
SelectedOutputs?: string[];
|
|
2742
|
+
SelectedOutputs?: string[] | undefined;
|
|
2743
2743
|
}
|
|
2744
2744
|
/**
|
|
2745
2745
|
* @public
|
|
@@ -2762,22 +2762,22 @@ export interface HlsCaptionLanguageMapping {
|
|
|
2762
2762
|
* Caption channel.
|
|
2763
2763
|
* @public
|
|
2764
2764
|
*/
|
|
2765
|
-
CaptionChannel?: number;
|
|
2765
|
+
CaptionChannel?: number | undefined;
|
|
2766
2766
|
/**
|
|
2767
2767
|
* Specify the language for this captions channel, using the ISO 639-2 or ISO 639-3 three-letter language code
|
|
2768
2768
|
* @public
|
|
2769
2769
|
*/
|
|
2770
|
-
CustomLanguageCode?: string;
|
|
2770
|
+
CustomLanguageCode?: string | undefined;
|
|
2771
2771
|
/**
|
|
2772
2772
|
* Specify the language, using the ISO 639-2 three-letter code listed at https://www.loc.gov/standards/iso639-2/php/code_list.php.
|
|
2773
2773
|
* @public
|
|
2774
2774
|
*/
|
|
2775
|
-
LanguageCode?: LanguageCode;
|
|
2775
|
+
LanguageCode?: LanguageCode | undefined;
|
|
2776
2776
|
/**
|
|
2777
2777
|
* Caption language description.
|
|
2778
2778
|
* @public
|
|
2779
2779
|
*/
|
|
2780
|
-
LanguageDescription?: string;
|
|
2780
|
+
LanguageDescription?: string | undefined;
|
|
2781
2781
|
}
|
|
2782
2782
|
/**
|
|
2783
2783
|
* Optional. Configuration for a destination queue to which the job can hop once a customer-defined minimum wait time has passed.
|
|
@@ -2788,17 +2788,17 @@ export interface HopDestination {
|
|
|
2788
2788
|
* Optional. When you set up a job to use queue hopping, you can specify a different relative priority for the job in the destination queue. If you don't specify, the relative priority will remain the same as in the previous queue.
|
|
2789
2789
|
* @public
|
|
2790
2790
|
*/
|
|
2791
|
-
Priority?: number;
|
|
2791
|
+
Priority?: number | undefined;
|
|
2792
2792
|
/**
|
|
2793
2793
|
* Optional unless the job is submitted on the default queue. When you set up a job to use queue hopping, you can specify a destination queue. This queue cannot be the original queue to which the job is submitted. If the original queue isn't the default queue and you don't specify the destination queue, the job will move to the default queue.
|
|
2794
2794
|
* @public
|
|
2795
2795
|
*/
|
|
2796
|
-
Queue?: string;
|
|
2796
|
+
Queue?: string | undefined;
|
|
2797
2797
|
/**
|
|
2798
2798
|
* Required for setting up a job to use queue hopping. Minimum wait time in minutes until the job can hop to the destination queue. Valid range is 1 to 4320 minutes, inclusive.
|
|
2799
2799
|
* @public
|
|
2800
2800
|
*/
|
|
2801
|
-
WaitMinutes?: number;
|
|
2801
|
+
WaitMinutes?: number | undefined;
|
|
2802
2802
|
}
|
|
2803
2803
|
/**
|
|
2804
2804
|
* To insert ID3 tags in your output, specify two values. Use ID3 tag to specify the base 64 encoded string and use Timecode to specify the time when the tag should be inserted. To insert multiple ID3 tags in your output, create multiple instances of ID3 insertion.
|
|
@@ -2809,12 +2809,12 @@ export interface Id3Insertion {
|
|
|
2809
2809
|
* Use ID3 tag to provide a fully formed ID3 tag in base64-encode format.
|
|
2810
2810
|
* @public
|
|
2811
2811
|
*/
|
|
2812
|
-
Id3?: string;
|
|
2812
|
+
Id3?: string | undefined;
|
|
2813
2813
|
/**
|
|
2814
2814
|
* Provide a Timecode in HH:MM:SS:FF or HH:MM:SS;FF format.
|
|
2815
2815
|
* @public
|
|
2816
2816
|
*/
|
|
2817
|
-
Timecode?: string;
|
|
2817
|
+
Timecode?: string | undefined;
|
|
2818
2818
|
}
|
|
2819
2819
|
/**
|
|
2820
2820
|
* @public
|
|
@@ -2862,12 +2862,12 @@ export interface AdvancedInputFilterSettings {
|
|
|
2862
2862
|
* Add texture and detail to areas of your input video content that were lost after applying the Advanced input filter. To adaptively add texture and reduce softness: Choose Enabled. To not add any texture: Keep the default value, Disabled. We recommend that you choose Disabled for input video content that doesn't have texture, including screen recordings, computer graphics, or cartoons.
|
|
2863
2863
|
* @public
|
|
2864
2864
|
*/
|
|
2865
|
-
AddTexture?: AdvancedInputFilterAddTexture;
|
|
2865
|
+
AddTexture?: AdvancedInputFilterAddTexture | undefined;
|
|
2866
2866
|
/**
|
|
2867
2867
|
* Optionally specify the amount of sharpening to apply when you use the Advanced input filter. Sharpening adds contrast to the edges of your video content and can reduce softness. To apply no sharpening: Keep the default value, Off. To apply a minimal amount of sharpening choose Low, or for the maximum choose High.
|
|
2868
2868
|
* @public
|
|
2869
2869
|
*/
|
|
2870
|
-
Sharpening?: AdvancedInputFilterSharpen;
|
|
2870
|
+
Sharpening?: AdvancedInputFilterSharpen | undefined;
|
|
2871
2871
|
}
|
|
2872
2872
|
/**
|
|
2873
2873
|
* Use audio selector groups to combine multiple sidecar audio inputs so that you can assign them to a single output audio tab. Note that, if you're working with embedded audio, it's simpler to assign multiple input tracks into a single audio selector rather than use an audio selector group.
|
|
@@ -2878,7 +2878,7 @@ export interface AudioSelectorGroup {
|
|
|
2878
2878
|
* Name of an Audio Selector within the same input to include in the group. Audio selector names are standardized, based on their order within the input (e.g., "Audio Selector 1"). The audio selector name parameter can be repeated to add any number of audio selectors to the group.
|
|
2879
2879
|
* @public
|
|
2880
2880
|
*/
|
|
2881
|
-
AudioSelectorNames?: string[];
|
|
2881
|
+
AudioSelectorNames?: string[] | undefined;
|
|
2882
2882
|
}
|
|
2883
2883
|
/**
|
|
2884
2884
|
* @public
|
|
@@ -2916,17 +2916,17 @@ export interface HlsRenditionGroupSettings {
|
|
|
2916
2916
|
* Optional. Specify alternative group ID
|
|
2917
2917
|
* @public
|
|
2918
2918
|
*/
|
|
2919
|
-
RenditionGroupId?: string;
|
|
2919
|
+
RenditionGroupId?: string | undefined;
|
|
2920
2920
|
/**
|
|
2921
2921
|
* Optional. Specify ISO 639-2 or ISO 639-3 code in the language property
|
|
2922
2922
|
* @public
|
|
2923
2923
|
*/
|
|
2924
|
-
RenditionLanguageCode?: LanguageCode;
|
|
2924
|
+
RenditionLanguageCode?: LanguageCode | undefined;
|
|
2925
2925
|
/**
|
|
2926
2926
|
* Optional. Specify media name
|
|
2927
2927
|
* @public
|
|
2928
2928
|
*/
|
|
2929
|
-
RenditionName?: string;
|
|
2929
|
+
RenditionName?: string | undefined;
|
|
2930
2930
|
}
|
|
2931
2931
|
/**
|
|
2932
2932
|
* @public
|
|
@@ -2951,62 +2951,62 @@ export interface AudioSelector {
|
|
|
2951
2951
|
* Apply audio timing corrections to help synchronize audio and video in your output. To apply timing corrections, your input must meet the following requirements: * Container: MP4, or MOV, with an accurate time-to-sample (STTS) table. * Audio track: AAC. Choose from the following audio timing correction settings: * Disabled (Default): Apply no correction. * Auto: Recommended for most inputs. MediaConvert analyzes the audio timing in your input and determines which correction setting to use, if needed. * Track: Adjust the duration of each audio frame by a constant amount to align the audio track length with STTS duration. Track-level correction does not affect pitch, and is recommended for tonal audio content such as music. * Frame: Adjust the duration of each audio frame by a variable amount to align audio frames with STTS timestamps. No corrections are made to already-aligned frames. Frame-level correction may affect the pitch of corrected frames, and is recommended for atonal audio content such as speech or percussion. * Force: Apply audio duration correction, either Track or Frame depending on your input, regardless of the accuracy of your input's STTS table. Your output audio and video may not be aligned or it may contain audio artifacts.
|
|
2952
2952
|
* @public
|
|
2953
2953
|
*/
|
|
2954
|
-
AudioDurationCorrection?: AudioDurationCorrection;
|
|
2954
|
+
AudioDurationCorrection?: AudioDurationCorrection | undefined;
|
|
2955
2955
|
/**
|
|
2956
2956
|
* Selects a specific language code from within an audio source, using the ISO 639-2 or ISO 639-3 three-letter language code
|
|
2957
2957
|
* @public
|
|
2958
2958
|
*/
|
|
2959
|
-
CustomLanguageCode?: string;
|
|
2959
|
+
CustomLanguageCode?: string | undefined;
|
|
2960
2960
|
/**
|
|
2961
2961
|
* Enable this setting on one audio selector to set it as the default for the job. The service uses this default for outputs where it can't find the specified input audio. If you don't set a default, those outputs have no audio.
|
|
2962
2962
|
* @public
|
|
2963
2963
|
*/
|
|
2964
|
-
DefaultSelection?: AudioDefaultSelection;
|
|
2964
|
+
DefaultSelection?: AudioDefaultSelection | undefined;
|
|
2965
2965
|
/**
|
|
2966
2966
|
* Specifies audio data from an external file source.
|
|
2967
2967
|
* @public
|
|
2968
2968
|
*/
|
|
2969
|
-
ExternalAudioFileInput?: string;
|
|
2969
|
+
ExternalAudioFileInput?: string | undefined;
|
|
2970
2970
|
/**
|
|
2971
2971
|
* Settings specific to audio sources in an HLS alternate rendition group. Specify the properties (renditionGroupId, renditionName or renditionLanguageCode) to identify the unique audio track among the alternative rendition groups present in the HLS manifest. If no unique track is found, or multiple tracks match the properties provided, the job fails. If no properties in hlsRenditionGroupSettings are specified, the default audio track within the video segment is chosen. If there is no audio within video segment, the alternative audio with DEFAULT=YES is chosen instead.
|
|
2972
2972
|
* @public
|
|
2973
2973
|
*/
|
|
2974
|
-
HlsRenditionGroupSettings?: HlsRenditionGroupSettings;
|
|
2974
|
+
HlsRenditionGroupSettings?: HlsRenditionGroupSettings | undefined;
|
|
2975
2975
|
/**
|
|
2976
2976
|
* Selects a specific language code from within an audio source.
|
|
2977
2977
|
* @public
|
|
2978
2978
|
*/
|
|
2979
|
-
LanguageCode?: LanguageCode;
|
|
2979
|
+
LanguageCode?: LanguageCode | undefined;
|
|
2980
2980
|
/**
|
|
2981
2981
|
* Specifies a time delta in milliseconds to offset the audio from the input video.
|
|
2982
2982
|
* @public
|
|
2983
2983
|
*/
|
|
2984
|
-
Offset?: number;
|
|
2984
|
+
Offset?: number | undefined;
|
|
2985
2985
|
/**
|
|
2986
2986
|
* Selects a specific PID from within an audio source (e.g. 257 selects PID 0x101).
|
|
2987
2987
|
* @public
|
|
2988
2988
|
*/
|
|
2989
|
-
Pids?: number[];
|
|
2989
|
+
Pids?: number[] | undefined;
|
|
2990
2990
|
/**
|
|
2991
2991
|
* Use this setting for input streams that contain Dolby E, to have the service extract specific program data from the track. To select multiple programs, create multiple selectors with the same Track and different Program numbers. In the console, this setting is visible when you set Selector type to Track. Choose the program number from the dropdown list. If your input file has incorrect metadata, you can choose All channels instead of a program number to have the service ignore the program IDs and include all the programs in the track.
|
|
2992
2992
|
* @public
|
|
2993
2993
|
*/
|
|
2994
|
-
ProgramSelection?: number;
|
|
2994
|
+
ProgramSelection?: number | undefined;
|
|
2995
2995
|
/**
|
|
2996
2996
|
* Use these settings to reorder the audio channels of one input to match those of another input. This allows you to combine the two files into a single output, one after the other.
|
|
2997
2997
|
* @public
|
|
2998
2998
|
*/
|
|
2999
|
-
RemixSettings?: RemixSettings;
|
|
2999
|
+
RemixSettings?: RemixSettings | undefined;
|
|
3000
3000
|
/**
|
|
3001
3001
|
* Specifies the type of the audio selector.
|
|
3002
3002
|
* @public
|
|
3003
3003
|
*/
|
|
3004
|
-
SelectorType?: AudioSelectorType;
|
|
3004
|
+
SelectorType?: AudioSelectorType | undefined;
|
|
3005
3005
|
/**
|
|
3006
3006
|
* Identify a track from the input audio to include in this selector by entering the track index number. To include several tracks in a single audio selector, specify multiple tracks as follows. Using the console, enter a comma-separated list. For example, type "1,2,3" to include tracks 1 through 3.
|
|
3007
3007
|
* @public
|
|
3008
3008
|
*/
|
|
3009
|
-
Tracks?: number[];
|
|
3009
|
+
Tracks?: number[] | undefined;
|
|
3010
3010
|
}
|
|
3011
3011
|
/**
|
|
3012
3012
|
* @public
|
|
@@ -3041,17 +3041,17 @@ export interface AncillarySourceSettings {
|
|
|
3041
3041
|
* Specify whether this set of input captions appears in your outputs in both 608 and 708 format. If you choose Upconvert, MediaConvert includes the captions data in two ways: it passes the 608 data through using the 608 compatibility bytes fields of the 708 wrapper, and it also translates the 608 data into 708.
|
|
3042
3042
|
* @public
|
|
3043
3043
|
*/
|
|
3044
|
-
Convert608To708?: AncillaryConvert608To708;
|
|
3044
|
+
Convert608To708?: AncillaryConvert608To708 | undefined;
|
|
3045
3045
|
/**
|
|
3046
3046
|
* Specifies the 608 channel number in the ancillary data track from which to extract captions. Unused for passthrough.
|
|
3047
3047
|
* @public
|
|
3048
3048
|
*/
|
|
3049
|
-
SourceAncillaryChannelNumber?: number;
|
|
3049
|
+
SourceAncillaryChannelNumber?: number | undefined;
|
|
3050
3050
|
/**
|
|
3051
3051
|
* By default, the service terminates any unterminated captions at the end of each input. If you want the caption to continue onto your next input, disable this setting.
|
|
3052
3052
|
* @public
|
|
3053
3053
|
*/
|
|
3054
|
-
TerminateCaptions?: AncillaryTerminateCaptions;
|
|
3054
|
+
TerminateCaptions?: AncillaryTerminateCaptions | undefined;
|
|
3055
3055
|
}
|
|
3056
3056
|
/**
|
|
3057
3057
|
* DVB Sub Source Settings
|
|
@@ -3062,7 +3062,7 @@ export interface DvbSubSourceSettings {
|
|
|
3062
3062
|
* When using DVB-Sub with Burn-in, use this PID for the source content. Unused for DVB-Sub passthrough. All DVB-Sub content is passed through, regardless of selectors.
|
|
3063
3063
|
* @public
|
|
3064
3064
|
*/
|
|
3065
|
-
Pid?: number;
|
|
3065
|
+
Pid?: number | undefined;
|
|
3066
3066
|
}
|
|
3067
3067
|
/**
|
|
3068
3068
|
* @public
|
|
@@ -3097,22 +3097,22 @@ export interface EmbeddedSourceSettings {
|
|
|
3097
3097
|
* Specify whether this set of input captions appears in your outputs in both 608 and 708 format. If you choose Upconvert, MediaConvert includes the captions data in two ways: it passes the 608 data through using the 608 compatibility bytes fields of the 708 wrapper, and it also translates the 608 data into 708.
|
|
3098
3098
|
* @public
|
|
3099
3099
|
*/
|
|
3100
|
-
Convert608To708?: EmbeddedConvert608To708;
|
|
3100
|
+
Convert608To708?: EmbeddedConvert608To708 | undefined;
|
|
3101
3101
|
/**
|
|
3102
3102
|
* Specifies the 608/708 channel number within the video track from which to extract captions. Unused for passthrough.
|
|
3103
3103
|
* @public
|
|
3104
3104
|
*/
|
|
3105
|
-
Source608ChannelNumber?: number;
|
|
3105
|
+
Source608ChannelNumber?: number | undefined;
|
|
3106
3106
|
/**
|
|
3107
3107
|
* Specifies the video track index used for extracting captions. The system only supports one input video track, so this should always be set to '1'.
|
|
3108
3108
|
* @public
|
|
3109
3109
|
*/
|
|
3110
|
-
Source608TrackNumber?: number;
|
|
3110
|
+
Source608TrackNumber?: number | undefined;
|
|
3111
3111
|
/**
|
|
3112
3112
|
* By default, the service terminates any unterminated captions at the end of each input. If you want the caption to continue onto your next input, disable this setting.
|
|
3113
3113
|
* @public
|
|
3114
3114
|
*/
|
|
3115
|
-
TerminateCaptions?: EmbeddedTerminateCaptions;
|
|
3115
|
+
TerminateCaptions?: EmbeddedTerminateCaptions | undefined;
|
|
3116
3116
|
}
|
|
3117
3117
|
/**
|
|
3118
3118
|
* @public
|
|
@@ -3159,12 +3159,12 @@ export interface CaptionSourceFramerate {
|
|
|
3159
3159
|
* Specify the denominator of the fraction that represents the frame rate for the setting Caption source frame rate. Use this setting along with the setting Framerate numerator.
|
|
3160
3160
|
* @public
|
|
3161
3161
|
*/
|
|
3162
|
-
FramerateDenominator?: number;
|
|
3162
|
+
FramerateDenominator?: number | undefined;
|
|
3163
3163
|
/**
|
|
3164
3164
|
* Specify the numerator of the fraction that represents the frame rate for the setting Caption source frame rate. Use this setting along with the setting Framerate denominator.
|
|
3165
3165
|
* @public
|
|
3166
3166
|
*/
|
|
3167
|
-
FramerateNumerator?: number;
|
|
3167
|
+
FramerateNumerator?: number | undefined;
|
|
3168
3168
|
}
|
|
3169
3169
|
/**
|
|
3170
3170
|
* @public
|
|
@@ -3187,37 +3187,37 @@ export interface FileSourceSettings {
|
|
|
3187
3187
|
* Choose whether to limit the byte rate at which your SCC input captions are inserted into your output. To not limit the caption rate: We recommend that you keep the default value, Disabled. MediaConvert inserts captions in your output according to the byte rates listed in the EIA-608 specification, typically 2 or 3 caption bytes per frame depending on your output frame rate. To limit your output caption rate: Choose Enabled. Choose this option if your downstream systems require a maximum of 2 caption bytes per frame. Note that this setting has no effect when your output frame rate is 30 or 60.
|
|
3188
3188
|
* @public
|
|
3189
3189
|
*/
|
|
3190
|
-
ByteRateLimit?: CaptionSourceByteRateLimit;
|
|
3190
|
+
ByteRateLimit?: CaptionSourceByteRateLimit | undefined;
|
|
3191
3191
|
/**
|
|
3192
3192
|
* Specify whether this set of input captions appears in your outputs in both 608 and 708 format. If you choose Upconvert, MediaConvert includes the captions data in two ways: it passes the 608 data through using the 608 compatibility bytes fields of the 708 wrapper, and it also translates the 608 data into 708.
|
|
3193
3193
|
* @public
|
|
3194
3194
|
*/
|
|
3195
|
-
Convert608To708?: FileSourceConvert608To708;
|
|
3195
|
+
Convert608To708?: FileSourceConvert608To708 | undefined;
|
|
3196
3196
|
/**
|
|
3197
3197
|
* Choose the presentation style of your input SCC captions. To use the same presentation style as your input: Keep the default value, Disabled. To convert paint-on captions to pop-on: Choose Enabled. We also recommend that you choose Enabled if you notice additional repeated lines in your output captions.
|
|
3198
3198
|
* @public
|
|
3199
3199
|
*/
|
|
3200
|
-
ConvertPaintToPop?: CaptionSourceConvertPaintOnToPopOn;
|
|
3200
|
+
ConvertPaintToPop?: CaptionSourceConvertPaintOnToPopOn | undefined;
|
|
3201
3201
|
/**
|
|
3202
3202
|
* Ignore this setting unless your input captions format is SCC. To have the service compensate for differing frame rates between your input captions and input video, specify the frame rate of the captions file. Specify this value as a fraction. For example, you might specify 24 / 1 for 24 fps, 25 / 1 for 25 fps, 24000 / 1001 for 23.976 fps, or 30000 / 1001 for 29.97 fps.
|
|
3203
3203
|
* @public
|
|
3204
3204
|
*/
|
|
3205
|
-
Framerate?: CaptionSourceFramerate;
|
|
3205
|
+
Framerate?: CaptionSourceFramerate | undefined;
|
|
3206
3206
|
/**
|
|
3207
3207
|
* External caption file used for loading captions. Accepted file extensions are 'scc', 'ttml', 'dfxp', 'stl', 'srt', 'xml', 'smi', 'webvtt', and 'vtt'.
|
|
3208
3208
|
* @public
|
|
3209
3209
|
*/
|
|
3210
|
-
SourceFile?: string;
|
|
3210
|
+
SourceFile?: string | undefined;
|
|
3211
3211
|
/**
|
|
3212
3212
|
* Optional. Use this setting when you need to adjust the sync between your sidecar captions and your video. For more information, see https://docs.aws.amazon.com/mediaconvert/latest/ug/time-delta-use-cases.html. Enter a positive or negative number to modify the times in the captions file. For example, type 15 to add 15 seconds to all the times in the captions file. Type -5 to subtract 5 seconds from the times in the captions file. You can optionally specify your time delta in milliseconds instead of seconds. When you do so, set the related setting, Time delta units to Milliseconds. Note that, when you specify a time delta for timecode-based caption sources, such as SCC and STL, and your time delta isn't a multiple of the input frame rate, MediaConvert snaps the captions to the nearest frame. For example, when your input video frame rate is 25 fps and you specify 1010ms for time delta, MediaConvert delays your captions by 1000 ms.
|
|
3213
3213
|
* @public
|
|
3214
3214
|
*/
|
|
3215
|
-
TimeDelta?: number;
|
|
3215
|
+
TimeDelta?: number | undefined;
|
|
3216
3216
|
/**
|
|
3217
3217
|
* When you use the setting Time delta to adjust the sync between your sidecar captions and your video, use this setting to specify the units for the delta that you specify. When you don't specify a value for Time delta units, MediaConvert uses seconds by default.
|
|
3218
3218
|
* @public
|
|
3219
3219
|
*/
|
|
3220
|
-
TimeDeltaUnits?: FileSourceTimeDeltaUnits;
|
|
3220
|
+
TimeDeltaUnits?: FileSourceTimeDeltaUnits | undefined;
|
|
3221
3221
|
}
|
|
3222
3222
|
/**
|
|
3223
3223
|
* @public
|
|
@@ -3252,7 +3252,7 @@ export interface TeletextSourceSettings {
|
|
|
3252
3252
|
* Use Page Number to specify the three-digit hexadecimal page number that will be used for Teletext captions. Do not use this setting if you are passing through teletext from the input source to output.
|
|
3253
3253
|
* @public
|
|
3254
3254
|
*/
|
|
3255
|
-
PageNumber?: string;
|
|
3255
|
+
PageNumber?: string | undefined;
|
|
3256
3256
|
}
|
|
3257
3257
|
/**
|
|
3258
3258
|
* Settings specific to caption sources that are specified by track number. Currently, this is only IMSC captions in an IMF package. If your caption source is IMSC 1.1 in a separate xml file, use FileSourceSettings instead of TrackSourceSettings.
|
|
@@ -3263,7 +3263,7 @@ export interface TrackSourceSettings {
|
|
|
3263
3263
|
* Use this setting to select a single captions track from a source. Track numbers correspond to the order in the captions source file. For IMF sources, track numbering is based on the order that the captions appear in the CPL. For example, use 1 to select the captions asset that is listed first in the CPL. To include more than one captions track in your job outputs, create multiple input captions selectors. Specify one track per selector.
|
|
3264
3264
|
* @public
|
|
3265
3265
|
*/
|
|
3266
|
-
TrackNumber?: number;
|
|
3266
|
+
TrackNumber?: number | undefined;
|
|
3267
3267
|
}
|
|
3268
3268
|
/**
|
|
3269
3269
|
* Settings specific to WebVTT sources in HLS alternative rendition group. Specify the properties (renditionGroupId, renditionName or renditionLanguageCode) to identify the unique subtitle track among the alternative rendition groups present in the HLS manifest. If no unique track is found, or multiple tracks match the specified properties, the job fails. If there is only one subtitle track in the rendition group, the settings can be left empty and the default subtitle track will be chosen. If your caption source is a sidecar file, use FileSourceSettings instead of WebvttHlsSourceSettings.
|
|
@@ -3274,17 +3274,17 @@ export interface WebvttHlsSourceSettings {
|
|
|
3274
3274
|
* Optional. Specify alternative group ID
|
|
3275
3275
|
* @public
|
|
3276
3276
|
*/
|
|
3277
|
-
RenditionGroupId?: string;
|
|
3277
|
+
RenditionGroupId?: string | undefined;
|
|
3278
3278
|
/**
|
|
3279
3279
|
* Optional. Specify ISO 639-2 or ISO 639-3 code in the language property
|
|
3280
3280
|
* @public
|
|
3281
3281
|
*/
|
|
3282
|
-
RenditionLanguageCode?: LanguageCode;
|
|
3282
|
+
RenditionLanguageCode?: LanguageCode | undefined;
|
|
3283
3283
|
/**
|
|
3284
3284
|
* Optional. Specify media name
|
|
3285
3285
|
* @public
|
|
3286
3286
|
*/
|
|
3287
|
-
RenditionName?: string;
|
|
3287
|
+
RenditionName?: string | undefined;
|
|
3288
3288
|
}
|
|
3289
3289
|
/**
|
|
3290
3290
|
* If your input captions are SCC, TTML, STL, SMI, SRT, or IMSC in an xml file, specify the URI of the input captions source file. If your input captions are IMSC in an IMF package, use TrackSourceSettings instead of FileSoureSettings.
|
|
@@ -3295,42 +3295,42 @@ export interface CaptionSourceSettings {
|
|
|
3295
3295
|
* Settings for ancillary captions source.
|
|
3296
3296
|
* @public
|
|
3297
3297
|
*/
|
|
3298
|
-
AncillarySourceSettings?: AncillarySourceSettings;
|
|
3298
|
+
AncillarySourceSettings?: AncillarySourceSettings | undefined;
|
|
3299
3299
|
/**
|
|
3300
3300
|
* DVB Sub Source Settings
|
|
3301
3301
|
* @public
|
|
3302
3302
|
*/
|
|
3303
|
-
DvbSubSourceSettings?: DvbSubSourceSettings;
|
|
3303
|
+
DvbSubSourceSettings?: DvbSubSourceSettings | undefined;
|
|
3304
3304
|
/**
|
|
3305
3305
|
* Settings for embedded captions Source
|
|
3306
3306
|
* @public
|
|
3307
3307
|
*/
|
|
3308
|
-
EmbeddedSourceSettings?: EmbeddedSourceSettings;
|
|
3308
|
+
EmbeddedSourceSettings?: EmbeddedSourceSettings | undefined;
|
|
3309
3309
|
/**
|
|
3310
3310
|
* If your input captions are SCC, SMI, SRT, STL, TTML, WebVTT, or IMSC 1.1 in an xml file, specify the URI of the input caption source file. If your caption source is IMSC in an IMF package, use TrackSourceSettings instead of FileSoureSettings.
|
|
3311
3311
|
* @public
|
|
3312
3312
|
*/
|
|
3313
|
-
FileSourceSettings?: FileSourceSettings;
|
|
3313
|
+
FileSourceSettings?: FileSourceSettings | undefined;
|
|
3314
3314
|
/**
|
|
3315
3315
|
* Use Source to identify the format of your input captions. The service cannot auto-detect caption format.
|
|
3316
3316
|
* @public
|
|
3317
3317
|
*/
|
|
3318
|
-
SourceType?: CaptionSourceType;
|
|
3318
|
+
SourceType?: CaptionSourceType | undefined;
|
|
3319
3319
|
/**
|
|
3320
3320
|
* Settings specific to Teletext caption sources, including Page number.
|
|
3321
3321
|
* @public
|
|
3322
3322
|
*/
|
|
3323
|
-
TeletextSourceSettings?: TeletextSourceSettings;
|
|
3323
|
+
TeletextSourceSettings?: TeletextSourceSettings | undefined;
|
|
3324
3324
|
/**
|
|
3325
3325
|
* Settings specific to caption sources that are specified by track number. Currently, this is only IMSC captions in an IMF package. If your caption source is IMSC 1.1 in a separate xml file, use FileSourceSettings instead of TrackSourceSettings.
|
|
3326
3326
|
* @public
|
|
3327
3327
|
*/
|
|
3328
|
-
TrackSourceSettings?: TrackSourceSettings;
|
|
3328
|
+
TrackSourceSettings?: TrackSourceSettings | undefined;
|
|
3329
3329
|
/**
|
|
3330
3330
|
* Settings specific to WebVTT sources in HLS alternative rendition group. Specify the properties (renditionGroupId, renditionName or renditionLanguageCode) to identify the unique subtitle track among the alternative rendition groups present in the HLS manifest. If no unique track is found, or multiple tracks match the specified properties, the job fails. If there is only one subtitle track in the rendition group, the settings can be left empty and the default subtitle track will be chosen. If your caption source is a sidecar file, use FileSourceSettings instead of WebvttHlsSourceSettings.
|
|
3331
3331
|
* @public
|
|
3332
3332
|
*/
|
|
3333
|
-
WebvttHlsSourceSettings?: WebvttHlsSourceSettings;
|
|
3333
|
+
WebvttHlsSourceSettings?: WebvttHlsSourceSettings | undefined;
|
|
3334
3334
|
}
|
|
3335
3335
|
/**
|
|
3336
3336
|
* Use captions selectors to specify the captions data from your input that you use in your outputs. You can use up to 100 captions selectors per input.
|
|
@@ -3341,17 +3341,17 @@ export interface CaptionSelector {
|
|
|
3341
3341
|
* The specific language to extract from source, using the ISO 639-2 or ISO 639-3 three-letter language code. If input is SCTE-27, complete this field and/or PID to select the caption language to extract. If input is DVB-Sub and output is Burn-in, complete this field and/or PID to select the caption language to extract. If input is DVB-Sub that is being passed through, omit this field (and PID field); there is no way to extract a specific language with pass-through captions.
|
|
3342
3342
|
* @public
|
|
3343
3343
|
*/
|
|
3344
|
-
CustomLanguageCode?: string;
|
|
3344
|
+
CustomLanguageCode?: string | undefined;
|
|
3345
3345
|
/**
|
|
3346
3346
|
* The specific language to extract from source. If input is SCTE-27, complete this field and/or PID to select the caption language to extract. If input is DVB-Sub and output is Burn-in, complete this field and/or PID to select the caption language to extract. If input is DVB-Sub that is being passed through, omit this field (and PID field); there is no way to extract a specific language with pass-through captions.
|
|
3347
3347
|
* @public
|
|
3348
3348
|
*/
|
|
3349
|
-
LanguageCode?: LanguageCode;
|
|
3349
|
+
LanguageCode?: LanguageCode | undefined;
|
|
3350
3350
|
/**
|
|
3351
3351
|
* If your input captions are SCC, TTML, STL, SMI, SRT, or IMSC in an xml file, specify the URI of the input captions source file. If your input captions are IMSC in an IMF package, use TrackSourceSettings instead of FileSoureSettings.
|
|
3352
3352
|
* @public
|
|
3353
3353
|
*/
|
|
3354
|
-
SourceSettings?: CaptionSourceSettings;
|
|
3354
|
+
SourceSettings?: CaptionSourceSettings | undefined;
|
|
3355
3355
|
}
|
|
3356
3356
|
/**
|
|
3357
3357
|
* Use Rectangle to identify a specific area of the video frame.
|
|
@@ -3362,22 +3362,22 @@ export interface Rectangle {
|
|
|
3362
3362
|
* Height of rectangle in pixels. Specify only even numbers.
|
|
3363
3363
|
* @public
|
|
3364
3364
|
*/
|
|
3365
|
-
Height?: number;
|
|
3365
|
+
Height?: number | undefined;
|
|
3366
3366
|
/**
|
|
3367
3367
|
* Width of rectangle in pixels. Specify only even numbers.
|
|
3368
3368
|
* @public
|
|
3369
3369
|
*/
|
|
3370
|
-
Width?: number;
|
|
3370
|
+
Width?: number | undefined;
|
|
3371
3371
|
/**
|
|
3372
3372
|
* The distance, in pixels, between the rectangle and the left edge of the video frame. Specify only even numbers.
|
|
3373
3373
|
* @public
|
|
3374
3374
|
*/
|
|
3375
|
-
X?: number;
|
|
3375
|
+
X?: number | undefined;
|
|
3376
3376
|
/**
|
|
3377
3377
|
* The distance, in pixels, between the rectangle and the top edge of the video frame. Specify only even numbers.
|
|
3378
3378
|
* @public
|
|
3379
3379
|
*/
|
|
3380
|
-
Y?: number;
|
|
3380
|
+
Y?: number | undefined;
|
|
3381
3381
|
}
|
|
3382
3382
|
/**
|
|
3383
3383
|
* @public
|
|
@@ -3413,22 +3413,22 @@ export interface InputDecryptionSettings {
|
|
|
3413
3413
|
* Specify the encryption mode that you used to encrypt your input files.
|
|
3414
3414
|
* @public
|
|
3415
3415
|
*/
|
|
3416
|
-
DecryptionMode?: DecryptionMode;
|
|
3416
|
+
DecryptionMode?: DecryptionMode | undefined;
|
|
3417
3417
|
/**
|
|
3418
3418
|
* Warning! Don't provide your encryption key in plaintext. Your job settings could be intercepted, making your encrypted content vulnerable. Specify the encrypted version of the data key that you used to encrypt your content. The data key must be encrypted by AWS Key Management Service (KMS). The key can be 128, 192, or 256 bits.
|
|
3419
3419
|
* @public
|
|
3420
3420
|
*/
|
|
3421
|
-
EncryptedDecryptionKey?: string;
|
|
3421
|
+
EncryptedDecryptionKey?: string | undefined;
|
|
3422
3422
|
/**
|
|
3423
3423
|
* Specify the initialization vector that you used when you encrypted your content before uploading it to Amazon S3. You can use a 16-byte initialization vector with any encryption mode. Or, you can use a 12-byte initialization vector with GCM or CTR. MediaConvert accepts only initialization vectors that are base64-encoded.
|
|
3424
3424
|
* @public
|
|
3425
3425
|
*/
|
|
3426
|
-
InitializationVector?: string;
|
|
3426
|
+
InitializationVector?: string | undefined;
|
|
3427
3427
|
/**
|
|
3428
3428
|
* Specify the AWS Region for AWS Key Management Service (KMS) that you used to encrypt your data key, if that Region is different from the one you are using for AWS Elemental MediaConvert.
|
|
3429
3429
|
* @public
|
|
3430
3430
|
*/
|
|
3431
|
-
KmsKeyRegion?: string;
|
|
3431
|
+
KmsKeyRegion?: string | undefined;
|
|
3432
3432
|
}
|
|
3433
3433
|
/**
|
|
3434
3434
|
* @public
|
|
@@ -3464,57 +3464,57 @@ export interface InsertableImage {
|
|
|
3464
3464
|
* Specify the time, in milliseconds, for the image to remain on the output video. This duration includes fade-in time but not fade-out time.
|
|
3465
3465
|
* @public
|
|
3466
3466
|
*/
|
|
3467
|
-
Duration?: number;
|
|
3467
|
+
Duration?: number | undefined;
|
|
3468
3468
|
/**
|
|
3469
3469
|
* Specify the length of time, in milliseconds, between the Start time that you specify for the image insertion and the time that the image appears at full opacity. Full opacity is the level that you specify for the opacity setting. If you don't specify a value for Fade-in, the image will appear abruptly at the overlay start time.
|
|
3470
3470
|
* @public
|
|
3471
3471
|
*/
|
|
3472
|
-
FadeIn?: number;
|
|
3472
|
+
FadeIn?: number | undefined;
|
|
3473
3473
|
/**
|
|
3474
3474
|
* Specify the length of time, in milliseconds, between the end of the time that you have specified for the image overlay Duration and when the overlaid image has faded to total transparency. If you don't specify a value for Fade-out, the image will disappear abruptly at the end of the inserted image duration.
|
|
3475
3475
|
* @public
|
|
3476
3476
|
*/
|
|
3477
|
-
FadeOut?: number;
|
|
3477
|
+
FadeOut?: number | undefined;
|
|
3478
3478
|
/**
|
|
3479
3479
|
* Specify the height of the inserted image in pixels. If you specify a value that's larger than the video resolution height, the service will crop your overlaid image to fit. To use the native height of the image, keep this setting blank.
|
|
3480
3480
|
* @public
|
|
3481
3481
|
*/
|
|
3482
|
-
Height?: number;
|
|
3482
|
+
Height?: number | undefined;
|
|
3483
3483
|
/**
|
|
3484
3484
|
* Specify the HTTP, HTTPS, or Amazon S3 location of the image that you want to overlay on the video. Use a PNG or TGA file.
|
|
3485
3485
|
* @public
|
|
3486
3486
|
*/
|
|
3487
|
-
ImageInserterInput?: string;
|
|
3487
|
+
ImageInserterInput?: string | undefined;
|
|
3488
3488
|
/**
|
|
3489
3489
|
* Specify the distance, in pixels, between the inserted image and the left edge of the video frame. Required for any image overlay that you specify.
|
|
3490
3490
|
* @public
|
|
3491
3491
|
*/
|
|
3492
|
-
ImageX?: number;
|
|
3492
|
+
ImageX?: number | undefined;
|
|
3493
3493
|
/**
|
|
3494
3494
|
* Specify the distance, in pixels, between the overlaid image and the top edge of the video frame. Required for any image overlay that you specify.
|
|
3495
3495
|
* @public
|
|
3496
3496
|
*/
|
|
3497
|
-
ImageY?: number;
|
|
3497
|
+
ImageY?: number | undefined;
|
|
3498
3498
|
/**
|
|
3499
3499
|
* Specify how overlapping inserted images appear. Images with higher values for Layer appear on top of images with lower values for Layer.
|
|
3500
3500
|
* @public
|
|
3501
3501
|
*/
|
|
3502
|
-
Layer?: number;
|
|
3502
|
+
Layer?: number | undefined;
|
|
3503
3503
|
/**
|
|
3504
3504
|
* Use Opacity to specify how much of the underlying video shows through the inserted image. 0 is transparent and 100 is fully opaque. Default is 50.
|
|
3505
3505
|
* @public
|
|
3506
3506
|
*/
|
|
3507
|
-
Opacity?: number;
|
|
3507
|
+
Opacity?: number | undefined;
|
|
3508
3508
|
/**
|
|
3509
3509
|
* Specify the timecode of the frame that you want the overlay to first appear on. This must be in timecode (HH:MM:SS:FF or HH:MM:SS;FF) format. Remember to take into account your timecode source settings.
|
|
3510
3510
|
* @public
|
|
3511
3511
|
*/
|
|
3512
|
-
StartTime?: string;
|
|
3512
|
+
StartTime?: string | undefined;
|
|
3513
3513
|
/**
|
|
3514
3514
|
* Specify the width of the inserted image in pixels. If you specify a value that's larger than the video resolution width, the service will crop your overlaid image to fit. To use the native width of the image, keep this setting blank.
|
|
3515
3515
|
* @public
|
|
3516
3516
|
*/
|
|
3517
|
-
Width?: number;
|
|
3517
|
+
Width?: number | undefined;
|
|
3518
3518
|
}
|
|
3519
3519
|
/**
|
|
3520
3520
|
* Use the image inserter feature to include a graphic overlay on your video. Enable or disable this feature for each input or output individually. For more information, see https://docs.aws.amazon.com/mediaconvert/latest/ug/graphic-overlay.html. This setting is disabled by default.
|
|
@@ -3525,12 +3525,12 @@ export interface ImageInserter {
|
|
|
3525
3525
|
* Specify the images that you want to overlay on your video. The images must be PNG or TGA files.
|
|
3526
3526
|
* @public
|
|
3527
3527
|
*/
|
|
3528
|
-
InsertableImages?: InsertableImage[];
|
|
3528
|
+
InsertableImages?: InsertableImage[] | undefined;
|
|
3529
3529
|
/**
|
|
3530
3530
|
* Specify the reference white level, in nits, for all of your image inserter images. Use to correct brightness levels within HDR10 outputs. For 1,000 nit peak brightness displays, we recommend that you set SDR reference white level to 203 (according to ITU-R BT.2408). Leave blank to use the default value of 100, or specify an integer from 100 to 1000.
|
|
3531
3531
|
* @public
|
|
3532
3532
|
*/
|
|
3533
|
-
SdrReferenceWhiteLevel?: number;
|
|
3533
|
+
SdrReferenceWhiteLevel?: number | undefined;
|
|
3534
3534
|
}
|
|
3535
3535
|
/**
|
|
3536
3536
|
* To transcode only portions of your input, include one input clip for each part of your input that you want in your output. All input clips that you specify will be included in every output of the job. For more information, see https://docs.aws.amazon.com/mediaconvert/latest/ug/assembling-multiple-inputs-and-input-clips.html.
|
|
@@ -3541,12 +3541,12 @@ export interface InputClipping {
|
|
|
3541
3541
|
* Set End timecode to the end of the portion of the input you are clipping. The frame corresponding to the End timecode value is included in the clip. Start timecode or End timecode may be left blank, but not both. Use the format HH:MM:SS:FF or HH:MM:SS;FF, where HH is the hour, MM is the minute, SS is the second, and FF is the frame number. When choosing this value, take into account your setting for timecode source under input settings. For example, if you have embedded timecodes that start at 01:00:00:00 and you want your clip to end six minutes into the video, use 01:06:00:00.
|
|
3542
3542
|
* @public
|
|
3543
3543
|
*/
|
|
3544
|
-
EndTimecode?: string;
|
|
3544
|
+
EndTimecode?: string | undefined;
|
|
3545
3545
|
/**
|
|
3546
3546
|
* Set Start timecode to the beginning of the portion of the input you are clipping. The frame corresponding to the Start timecode value is included in the clip. Start timecode or End timecode may be left blank, but not both. Use the format HH:MM:SS:FF or HH:MM:SS;FF, where HH is the hour, MM is the minute, SS is the second, and FF is the frame number. When choosing this value, take into account your setting for Input timecode source. For example, if you have embedded timecodes that start at 01:00:00:00 and you want your clip to begin five minutes into the video, use 01:05:00:00.
|
|
3547
3547
|
* @public
|
|
3548
3548
|
*/
|
|
3549
|
-
StartTimecode?: string;
|
|
3549
|
+
StartTimecode?: string | undefined;
|
|
3550
3550
|
}
|
|
3551
3551
|
/**
|
|
3552
3552
|
* @public
|
|
@@ -3594,29 +3594,29 @@ export interface InputVideoGenerator {
|
|
|
3594
3594
|
* Specify the number of audio channels to include in your video generator input. MediaConvert creates these audio channels as silent audio within a single audio track. Enter an integer from 1 to 32.
|
|
3595
3595
|
* @public
|
|
3596
3596
|
*/
|
|
3597
|
-
Channels?: number;
|
|
3597
|
+
Channels?: number | undefined;
|
|
3598
3598
|
/**
|
|
3599
3599
|
* Specify the duration, in milliseconds, for your video generator input.
|
|
3600
3600
|
* Enter an integer from 50 to 86400000.
|
|
3601
3601
|
* @public
|
|
3602
3602
|
*/
|
|
3603
|
-
Duration?: number;
|
|
3603
|
+
Duration?: number | undefined;
|
|
3604
3604
|
/**
|
|
3605
3605
|
* Specify the denominator of the fraction that represents the frame rate for your video generator input. When you do, you must also specify a value for Frame rate numerator. MediaConvert uses a default frame rate of 29.97 when you leave Frame rate numerator and Frame rate denominator blank.
|
|
3606
3606
|
* @public
|
|
3607
3607
|
*/
|
|
3608
|
-
FramerateDenominator?: number;
|
|
3608
|
+
FramerateDenominator?: number | undefined;
|
|
3609
3609
|
/**
|
|
3610
3610
|
* Specify the numerator of the fraction that represents the frame rate for your video generator input. When you do, you must also specify a value for Frame rate denominator. MediaConvert uses a default frame rate of 29.97 when you leave Frame rate numerator and Frame rate denominator blank.
|
|
3611
3611
|
* @public
|
|
3612
3612
|
*/
|
|
3613
|
-
FramerateNumerator?: number;
|
|
3613
|
+
FramerateNumerator?: number | undefined;
|
|
3614
3614
|
/**
|
|
3615
3615
|
* Specify the audio sample rate, in Hz, for the silent audio in your video generator input.
|
|
3616
3616
|
* Enter an integer from 32000 to 48000.
|
|
3617
3617
|
* @public
|
|
3618
3618
|
*/
|
|
3619
|
-
SampleRate?: number;
|
|
3619
|
+
SampleRate?: number | undefined;
|
|
3620
3620
|
}
|
|
3621
3621
|
/**
|
|
3622
3622
|
* @public
|
|
@@ -3639,27 +3639,27 @@ export interface VideoOverlayPosition {
|
|
|
3639
3639
|
* To scale your video overlay to the same height as the base input video: Leave blank. To scale the height of your video overlay to a different height: Enter an integer representing the Unit type that you choose, either Pixels or Percentage. For example, when you enter 360 and choose Pixels, your video overlay will be rendered with a height of 360. When you enter 50, choose Percentage, and your overlay's source has a height of 1080, your video overlay will be rendered with a height of 540. To scale your overlay to a specific height while automatically maintaining its original aspect ratio, enter a value for Height and leave Width blank.
|
|
3640
3640
|
* @public
|
|
3641
3641
|
*/
|
|
3642
|
-
Height?: number;
|
|
3642
|
+
Height?: number | undefined;
|
|
3643
3643
|
/**
|
|
3644
3644
|
* Specify the Unit type to use when you enter a value for X position, Y position, Width, or Height. You can choose Pixels or Percentage. Leave blank to use the default value, Pixels.
|
|
3645
3645
|
* @public
|
|
3646
3646
|
*/
|
|
3647
|
-
Unit?: VideoOverlayUnit;
|
|
3647
|
+
Unit?: VideoOverlayUnit | undefined;
|
|
3648
3648
|
/**
|
|
3649
3649
|
* To scale your video overlay to the same width as the base input video: Leave blank. To scale the width of your video overlay to a different width: Enter an integer representing the Unit type that you choose, either Pixels or Percentage. For example, when you enter 640 and choose Pixels, your video overlay will scale to a height of 640 pixels. When you enter 50, choose Percentage, and your overlay's source has a width of 1920, your video overlay will scale to a width of 960. To scale your overlay to a specific width while automatically maintaining its original aspect ratio, enter a value for Width and leave Height blank.
|
|
3650
3650
|
* @public
|
|
3651
3651
|
*/
|
|
3652
|
-
Width?: number;
|
|
3652
|
+
Width?: number | undefined;
|
|
3653
3653
|
/**
|
|
3654
3654
|
* To position the left edge of your video overlay along the left edge of the base input video's frame: Keep blank, or enter 0. To position the left edge of your video overlay to the right, relative to the left edge of the base input video's frame: Enter an integer representing the Unit type that you choose, either Pixels or Percentage. For example, when you enter 10 and choose Pixels, your video overlay will be positioned 10 pixels from the left edge of the base input video's frame. When you enter 10, choose Percentage, and your base input video is 1920x1080, your video overlay will be positioned 192 pixels from the left edge of the base input video's frame.
|
|
3655
3655
|
* @public
|
|
3656
3656
|
*/
|
|
3657
|
-
XPosition?: number;
|
|
3657
|
+
XPosition?: number | undefined;
|
|
3658
3658
|
/**
|
|
3659
3659
|
* To position the top edge of your video overlay along the top edge of the base input video's frame: Keep blank, or enter 0. To position the top edge of your video overlay down, relative to the top edge of the base input video's frame: Enter an integer representing the Unit type that you choose, either Pixels or Percentage. For example, when you enter 10 and choose Pixels, your video overlay will be positioned 10 pixels from the top edge of the base input video's frame. When you enter 10, choose Percentage, and your underlying video is 1920x1080, your video overlay will be positioned 108 pixels from the top edge of the base input video's frame.
|
|
3660
3660
|
* @public
|
|
3661
3661
|
*/
|
|
3662
|
-
YPosition?: number;
|
|
3662
|
+
YPosition?: number | undefined;
|
|
3663
3663
|
}
|
|
3664
3664
|
/**
|
|
3665
3665
|
* To transcode only portions of your video overlay, include one input clip for each part of your video overlay that you want in your output.
|
|
@@ -3670,12 +3670,12 @@ export interface VideoOverlayInputClipping {
|
|
|
3670
3670
|
* Specify the timecode of the last frame to include in your video overlay's clip. Use the format HH:MM:SS:FF or HH:MM:SS;FF, where HH is the hour, MM is the minute, SS is the second, and FF is the frame number. When entering this value, take into account your choice for Timecode source.
|
|
3671
3671
|
* @public
|
|
3672
3672
|
*/
|
|
3673
|
-
EndTimecode?: string;
|
|
3673
|
+
EndTimecode?: string | undefined;
|
|
3674
3674
|
/**
|
|
3675
3675
|
* Specify the timecode of the first frame to include in your video overlay's clip. Use the format HH:MM:SS:FF or HH:MM:SS;FF, where HH is the hour, MM is the minute, SS is the second, and FF is the frame number. When entering this value, take into account your choice for Timecode source.
|
|
3676
3676
|
* @public
|
|
3677
3677
|
*/
|
|
3678
|
-
StartTimecode?: string;
|
|
3678
|
+
StartTimecode?: string | undefined;
|
|
3679
3679
|
}
|
|
3680
3680
|
/**
|
|
3681
3681
|
* Input settings for Video overlay. You can include one or more video overlays in sequence at different times that you specify.
|
|
@@ -3687,22 +3687,22 @@ export interface VideoOverlayInput {
|
|
|
3687
3687
|
* To specify one or more Transitions for your base input video instead: Leave blank.
|
|
3688
3688
|
* @public
|
|
3689
3689
|
*/
|
|
3690
|
-
FileInput?: string;
|
|
3690
|
+
FileInput?: string | undefined;
|
|
3691
3691
|
/**
|
|
3692
3692
|
* Specify one or more clips to use from your video overlay. When you include an input clip, you must also specify its start timecode, end timecode, or both start and end timecode.
|
|
3693
3693
|
* @public
|
|
3694
3694
|
*/
|
|
3695
|
-
InputClippings?: VideoOverlayInputClipping[];
|
|
3695
|
+
InputClippings?: VideoOverlayInputClipping[] | undefined;
|
|
3696
3696
|
/**
|
|
3697
3697
|
* Specify the timecode source for your video overlay input clips. To use the timecode present in your video overlay: Choose Embedded. To use a zerobased timecode: Choose Start at 0. To choose a timecode: Choose Specified start. When you do, enter the starting timecode in Start timecode. If you don't specify a value for Timecode source, MediaConvert uses Embedded by default.
|
|
3698
3698
|
* @public
|
|
3699
3699
|
*/
|
|
3700
|
-
TimecodeSource?: InputTimecodeSource;
|
|
3700
|
+
TimecodeSource?: InputTimecodeSource | undefined;
|
|
3701
3701
|
/**
|
|
3702
3702
|
* Specify the starting timecode for this video overlay. To use this setting, you must set Timecode source to Specified start.
|
|
3703
3703
|
* @public
|
|
3704
3704
|
*/
|
|
3705
|
-
TimecodeStart?: string;
|
|
3705
|
+
TimecodeStart?: string | undefined;
|
|
3706
3706
|
}
|
|
3707
3707
|
/**
|
|
3708
3708
|
* @public
|
|
@@ -3725,17 +3725,17 @@ export interface VideoOverlayTransition {
|
|
|
3725
3725
|
* Specify the ending position for this transition, relative to the base input video's frame. Your video overlay will move smoothly to this position, beginning at this transition's Start timecode and ending at this transition's End timecode.
|
|
3726
3726
|
* @public
|
|
3727
3727
|
*/
|
|
3728
|
-
EndPosition?: VideoOverlayPosition;
|
|
3728
|
+
EndPosition?: VideoOverlayPosition | undefined;
|
|
3729
3729
|
/**
|
|
3730
3730
|
* Specify the timecode for when this transition ends. Use the format HH:MM:SS:FF or HH:MM:SS;FF, where HH is the hour, MM is the minute, SS is the second, and FF is the frame number. When entering this value, take into account your choice for Timecode source.
|
|
3731
3731
|
* @public
|
|
3732
3732
|
*/
|
|
3733
|
-
EndTimecode?: string;
|
|
3733
|
+
EndTimecode?: string | undefined;
|
|
3734
3734
|
/**
|
|
3735
3735
|
* Specify the timecode for when this transition begins. Use the format HH:MM:SS:FF or HH:MM:SS;FF, where HH is the hour, MM is the minute, SS is the second, and FF is the frame number. When entering this value, take into account your choice for Timecode source.
|
|
3736
3736
|
* @public
|
|
3737
3737
|
*/
|
|
3738
|
-
StartTimecode?: string;
|
|
3738
|
+
StartTimecode?: string | undefined;
|
|
3739
3739
|
}
|
|
3740
3740
|
/**
|
|
3741
3741
|
* Overlay one or more videos on top of your input video. For more information, see https://docs.aws.amazon.com/mediaconvert/latest/ug/video-overlays.html
|
|
@@ -3746,32 +3746,32 @@ export interface VideoOverlay {
|
|
|
3746
3746
|
* Enter the end timecode in the base input video for this overlay. Your overlay will be active through this frame. To display your video overlay for the duration of the base input video: Leave blank. Use the format HH:MM:SS:FF or HH:MM:SS;FF, where HH is the hour, MM is the minute, SS isthe second, and FF is the frame number. When entering this value, take into account your choice for the base input video's timecode source. For example, if you have embedded timecodes that start at 01:00:00:00 and you want your overlay to end ten minutes into the video, enter 01:10:00:00.
|
|
3747
3747
|
* @public
|
|
3748
3748
|
*/
|
|
3749
|
-
EndTimecode?: string;
|
|
3749
|
+
EndTimecode?: string | undefined;
|
|
3750
3750
|
/**
|
|
3751
3751
|
* Specify the Initial position of your video overlay. To specify the Initial position of your video overlay, including distance from the left or top edge of the base input video's frame, or size: Enter a value for X position, Y position, Width, or Height. To use the full frame of the base input video: Leave blank.
|
|
3752
3752
|
* @public
|
|
3753
3753
|
*/
|
|
3754
|
-
InitialPosition?: VideoOverlayPosition;
|
|
3754
|
+
InitialPosition?: VideoOverlayPosition | undefined;
|
|
3755
3755
|
/**
|
|
3756
3756
|
* Input settings for Video overlay. You can include one or more video overlays in sequence at different times that you specify.
|
|
3757
3757
|
* @public
|
|
3758
3758
|
*/
|
|
3759
|
-
Input?: VideoOverlayInput;
|
|
3759
|
+
Input?: VideoOverlayInput | undefined;
|
|
3760
3760
|
/**
|
|
3761
3761
|
* Specify whether your video overlay repeats or plays only once. To repeat your video overlay on a loop: Keep the default value, Repeat. Your overlay will repeat for the duration of the base input video. To playback your video overlay only once: Choose Once. With either option, you can end playback at a time that you specify by entering a value for End timecode.
|
|
3762
3762
|
* @public
|
|
3763
3763
|
*/
|
|
3764
|
-
Playback?: VideoOverlayPlayBackMode;
|
|
3764
|
+
Playback?: VideoOverlayPlayBackMode | undefined;
|
|
3765
3765
|
/**
|
|
3766
3766
|
* Enter the start timecode in the base input video for this overlay. Your overlay will be active starting with this frame. To display your video overlay starting at the beginning of the base input video: Leave blank. Use the format HH:MM:SS:FF or HH:MM:SS;FF, where HH is the hour, MM is the minute, SS is the second, and FF is the frame number. When entering this value, take into account your choice for the base input video's timecode source. For example, if you have embedded timecodes that start at 01:00:00:00 and you want your overlay to begin five minutes into the video, enter 01:05:00:00.
|
|
3767
3767
|
* @public
|
|
3768
3768
|
*/
|
|
3769
|
-
StartTimecode?: string;
|
|
3769
|
+
StartTimecode?: string | undefined;
|
|
3770
3770
|
/**
|
|
3771
3771
|
* Specify one or more transitions for your video overlay. Use Transitions to reposition or resize your overlay over time. To use the same position and size for the duration of your video overlay: Leave blank. To specify a Transition: Enter a value for Start timecode, End Timecode, X Position, Y Position, Width, or Height.
|
|
3772
3772
|
* @public
|
|
3773
3773
|
*/
|
|
3774
|
-
Transitions?: VideoOverlayTransition[];
|
|
3774
|
+
Transitions?: VideoOverlayTransition[] | undefined;
|
|
3775
3775
|
}
|
|
3776
3776
|
/**
|
|
3777
3777
|
* @public
|
|
@@ -3818,62 +3818,62 @@ export interface Hdr10Metadata {
|
|
|
3818
3818
|
* HDR Master Display Information must be provided by a color grader, using color grading tools. Range is 0 to 50,000, each increment represents 0.00002 in CIE1931 color coordinate. Note that this setting is not for color correction.
|
|
3819
3819
|
* @public
|
|
3820
3820
|
*/
|
|
3821
|
-
BluePrimaryX?: number;
|
|
3821
|
+
BluePrimaryX?: number | undefined;
|
|
3822
3822
|
/**
|
|
3823
3823
|
* HDR Master Display Information must be provided by a color grader, using color grading tools. Range is 0 to 50,000, each increment represents 0.00002 in CIE1931 color coordinate. Note that this setting is not for color correction.
|
|
3824
3824
|
* @public
|
|
3825
3825
|
*/
|
|
3826
|
-
BluePrimaryY?: number;
|
|
3826
|
+
BluePrimaryY?: number | undefined;
|
|
3827
3827
|
/**
|
|
3828
3828
|
* HDR Master Display Information must be provided by a color grader, using color grading tools. Range is 0 to 50,000, each increment represents 0.00002 in CIE1931 color coordinate. Note that this setting is not for color correction.
|
|
3829
3829
|
* @public
|
|
3830
3830
|
*/
|
|
3831
|
-
GreenPrimaryX?: number;
|
|
3831
|
+
GreenPrimaryX?: number | undefined;
|
|
3832
3832
|
/**
|
|
3833
3833
|
* HDR Master Display Information must be provided by a color grader, using color grading tools. Range is 0 to 50,000, each increment represents 0.00002 in CIE1931 color coordinate. Note that this setting is not for color correction.
|
|
3834
3834
|
* @public
|
|
3835
3835
|
*/
|
|
3836
|
-
GreenPrimaryY?: number;
|
|
3836
|
+
GreenPrimaryY?: number | undefined;
|
|
3837
3837
|
/**
|
|
3838
3838
|
* Maximum light level among all samples in the coded video sequence, in units of candelas per square meter. This setting doesn't have a default value; you must specify a value that is suitable for the content.
|
|
3839
3839
|
* @public
|
|
3840
3840
|
*/
|
|
3841
|
-
MaxContentLightLevel?: number;
|
|
3841
|
+
MaxContentLightLevel?: number | undefined;
|
|
3842
3842
|
/**
|
|
3843
3843
|
* Maximum average light level of any frame in the coded video sequence, in units of candelas per square meter. This setting doesn't have a default value; you must specify a value that is suitable for the content.
|
|
3844
3844
|
* @public
|
|
3845
3845
|
*/
|
|
3846
|
-
MaxFrameAverageLightLevel?: number;
|
|
3846
|
+
MaxFrameAverageLightLevel?: number | undefined;
|
|
3847
3847
|
/**
|
|
3848
3848
|
* Nominal maximum mastering display luminance in units of of 0.0001 candelas per square meter.
|
|
3849
3849
|
* @public
|
|
3850
3850
|
*/
|
|
3851
|
-
MaxLuminance?: number;
|
|
3851
|
+
MaxLuminance?: number | undefined;
|
|
3852
3852
|
/**
|
|
3853
3853
|
* Nominal minimum mastering display luminance in units of of 0.0001 candelas per square meter
|
|
3854
3854
|
* @public
|
|
3855
3855
|
*/
|
|
3856
|
-
MinLuminance?: number;
|
|
3856
|
+
MinLuminance?: number | undefined;
|
|
3857
3857
|
/**
|
|
3858
3858
|
* HDR Master Display Information must be provided by a color grader, using color grading tools. Range is 0 to 50,000, each increment represents 0.00002 in CIE1931 color coordinate. Note that this setting is not for color correction.
|
|
3859
3859
|
* @public
|
|
3860
3860
|
*/
|
|
3861
|
-
RedPrimaryX?: number;
|
|
3861
|
+
RedPrimaryX?: number | undefined;
|
|
3862
3862
|
/**
|
|
3863
3863
|
* HDR Master Display Information must be provided by a color grader, using color grading tools. Range is 0 to 50,000, each increment represents 0.00002 in CIE1931 color coordinate. Note that this setting is not for color correction.
|
|
3864
3864
|
* @public
|
|
3865
3865
|
*/
|
|
3866
|
-
RedPrimaryY?: number;
|
|
3866
|
+
RedPrimaryY?: number | undefined;
|
|
3867
3867
|
/**
|
|
3868
3868
|
* HDR Master Display Information must be provided by a color grader, using color grading tools. Range is 0 to 50,000, each increment represents 0.00002 in CIE1931 color coordinate. Note that this setting is not for color correction.
|
|
3869
3869
|
* @public
|
|
3870
3870
|
*/
|
|
3871
|
-
WhitePointX?: number;
|
|
3871
|
+
WhitePointX?: number | undefined;
|
|
3872
3872
|
/**
|
|
3873
3873
|
* HDR Master Display Information must be provided by a color grader, using color grading tools. Range is 0 to 50,000, each increment represents 0.00002 in CIE1931 color coordinate. Note that this setting is not for color correction.
|
|
3874
3874
|
* @public
|
|
3875
3875
|
*/
|
|
3876
|
-
WhitePointY?: number;
|
|
3876
|
+
WhitePointY?: number | undefined;
|
|
3877
3877
|
}
|
|
3878
3878
|
/**
|
|
3879
3879
|
* @public
|
|
@@ -3924,7 +3924,7 @@ export interface VideoSelector {
|
|
|
3924
3924
|
* Ignore this setting unless this input is a QuickTime animation with an alpha channel. Use this setting to create separate Key and Fill outputs. In each output, specify which part of the input MediaConvert uses. Leave this setting at the default value DISCARD to delete the alpha channel and preserve the video. Set it to REMAP_TO_LUMA to delete the video and map the alpha channel to the luma channel of your outputs.
|
|
3925
3925
|
* @public
|
|
3926
3926
|
*/
|
|
3927
|
-
AlphaBehavior?: AlphaBehavior;
|
|
3927
|
+
AlphaBehavior?: AlphaBehavior | undefined;
|
|
3928
3928
|
/**
|
|
3929
3929
|
* If your input video has accurate color space metadata, or if you don't know about color space: Keep the default value, Follow. MediaConvert will automatically detect your input color space. If your input video has metadata indicating the wrong color space, or has missing metadata: Specify the accurate color space here. If your input video is HDR 10 and the SMPTE ST 2086 Mastering Display Color Volume static metadata isn't present in your video stream, or if that metadata is present but not accurate: Choose Force HDR 10. Specify correct values in the input HDR 10 metadata settings. For more information about HDR jobs, see https://docs.aws.amazon.com/console/mediaconvert/hdr. When you specify an input color space, MediaConvert uses the following color space metadata, which includes color primaries, transfer characteristics, and matrix coefficients:
|
|
3930
3930
|
* * HDR 10: BT.2020, PQ, BT.2020 non-constant
|
|
@@ -3934,52 +3934,52 @@ export interface VideoSelector {
|
|
|
3934
3934
|
* * P3D65 (HDR): Display P3, PQ, BT.709
|
|
3935
3935
|
* @public
|
|
3936
3936
|
*/
|
|
3937
|
-
ColorSpace?: ColorSpace;
|
|
3937
|
+
ColorSpace?: ColorSpace | undefined;
|
|
3938
3938
|
/**
|
|
3939
3939
|
* There are two sources for color metadata, the input file and the job input settings Color space and HDR master display information settings. The Color space usage setting determines which takes precedence. Choose Force to use color metadata from the input job settings. If you don't specify values for those settings, the service defaults to using metadata from your input. FALLBACK - Choose Fallback to use color metadata from the source when it is present. If there's no color metadata in your input file, the service defaults to using values you specify in the input settings.
|
|
3940
3940
|
* @public
|
|
3941
3941
|
*/
|
|
3942
|
-
ColorSpaceUsage?: ColorSpaceUsage;
|
|
3942
|
+
ColorSpaceUsage?: ColorSpaceUsage | undefined;
|
|
3943
3943
|
/**
|
|
3944
3944
|
* Set Embedded timecode override to Use MDPM when your AVCHD input contains timecode tag data in the Modified Digital Video Pack Metadata. When you do, we recommend you also set Timecode source to Embedded. Leave Embedded timecode override blank, or set to None, when your input does not contain MDPM timecode.
|
|
3945
3945
|
* @public
|
|
3946
3946
|
*/
|
|
3947
|
-
EmbeddedTimecodeOverride?: EmbeddedTimecodeOverride;
|
|
3947
|
+
EmbeddedTimecodeOverride?: EmbeddedTimecodeOverride | undefined;
|
|
3948
3948
|
/**
|
|
3949
3949
|
* Use these settings to provide HDR 10 metadata that is missing or inaccurate in your input video. Appropriate values vary depending on the input video and must be provided by a color grader. The color grader generates these values during the HDR 10 mastering process. The valid range for each of these settings is 0 to 50,000. Each increment represents 0.00002 in CIE1931 color coordinate. Related settings - When you specify these values, you must also set Color space to HDR 10. To specify whether the the values you specify here take precedence over the values in the metadata of your input file, set Color space usage. To specify whether color metadata is included in an output, set Color metadata. For more information about MediaConvert HDR jobs, see https://docs.aws.amazon.com/console/mediaconvert/hdr.
|
|
3950
3950
|
* @public
|
|
3951
3951
|
*/
|
|
3952
|
-
Hdr10Metadata?: Hdr10Metadata;
|
|
3952
|
+
Hdr10Metadata?: Hdr10Metadata | undefined;
|
|
3953
3953
|
/**
|
|
3954
3954
|
* Specify the maximum mastering display luminance. Enter an integer from 0 to 2147483647, in units of 0.0001 nits. For example, enter 10000000 for 1000 nits.
|
|
3955
3955
|
* @public
|
|
3956
3956
|
*/
|
|
3957
|
-
MaxLuminance?: number;
|
|
3957
|
+
MaxLuminance?: number | undefined;
|
|
3958
3958
|
/**
|
|
3959
3959
|
* Use this setting if your input has video and audio durations that don't align, and your output or player has strict alignment requirements. Examples: Input audio track has a delayed start. Input video track ends before audio ends. When you set Pad video to Black, MediaConvert generates black video frames so that output video and audio durations match. Black video frames are added at the beginning or end, depending on your input. To keep the default behavior and not generate black video, set Pad video to Disabled or leave blank.
|
|
3960
3960
|
* @public
|
|
3961
3961
|
*/
|
|
3962
|
-
PadVideo?: PadVideo;
|
|
3962
|
+
PadVideo?: PadVideo | undefined;
|
|
3963
3963
|
/**
|
|
3964
3964
|
* Use PID to select specific video data from an input file. Specify this value as an integer; the system automatically converts it to the hexidecimal value. For example, 257 selects PID 0x101. A PID, or packet identifier, is an identifier for a set of data in an MPEG-2 transport stream container.
|
|
3965
3965
|
* @public
|
|
3966
3966
|
*/
|
|
3967
|
-
Pid?: number;
|
|
3967
|
+
Pid?: number | undefined;
|
|
3968
3968
|
/**
|
|
3969
3969
|
* Selects a specific program from within a multi-program transport stream. Note that Quad 4K is not currently supported.
|
|
3970
3970
|
* @public
|
|
3971
3971
|
*/
|
|
3972
|
-
ProgramNumber?: number;
|
|
3972
|
+
ProgramNumber?: number | undefined;
|
|
3973
3973
|
/**
|
|
3974
3974
|
* Use Rotate to specify how the service rotates your video. You can choose automatic rotation or specify a rotation. You can specify a clockwise rotation of 0, 90, 180, or 270 degrees. If your input video container is .mov or .mp4 and your input has rotation metadata, you can choose Automatic to have the service rotate your video according to the rotation specified in the metadata. The rotation must be within one degree of 90, 180, or 270 degrees. If the rotation metadata specifies any other rotation, the service will default to no rotation. By default, the service does no rotation, even if your input video has rotation metadata. The service doesn't pass through rotation metadata.
|
|
3975
3975
|
* @public
|
|
3976
3976
|
*/
|
|
3977
|
-
Rotate?: InputRotate;
|
|
3977
|
+
Rotate?: InputRotate | undefined;
|
|
3978
3978
|
/**
|
|
3979
3979
|
* If the sample range metadata in your input video is accurate, or if you don't know about sample range, keep the default value, Follow, for this setting. When you do, the service automatically detects your input sample range. If your input video has metadata indicating the wrong sample range, specify the accurate sample range here. When you do, MediaConvert ignores any sample range information in the input metadata. Regardless of whether MediaConvert uses the input sample range or the sample range that you specify, MediaConvert uses the sample range for transcoding and also writes it to the output metadata.
|
|
3980
3980
|
* @public
|
|
3981
3981
|
*/
|
|
3982
|
-
SampleRange?: InputSampleRange;
|
|
3982
|
+
SampleRange?: InputSampleRange | undefined;
|
|
3983
3983
|
}
|
|
3984
3984
|
/**
|
|
3985
3985
|
* Use inputs to define the source files used in your transcoding job. For more information, see https://docs.aws.amazon.com/mediaconvert/latest/ug/specify-input-settings.html. You can use multiple video inputs to do input stitching. For more information, see https://docs.aws.amazon.com/mediaconvert/latest/ug/assembling-multiple-inputs-and-input-clips.html
|
|
@@ -3990,129 +3990,129 @@ export interface Input {
|
|
|
3990
3990
|
* Use to remove noise, blocking, blurriness, or ringing from your input as a pre-filter step before encoding. The Advanced input filter removes more types of compression artifacts and is an improvement when compared to basic Deblock and Denoise filters. To remove video compression artifacts from your input and improve the video quality: Choose Enabled. Additionally, this filter can help increase the video quality of your output relative to its bitrate, since noisy inputs are more complex and require more bits to encode. To help restore loss of detail after applying the filter, you can optionally add texture or sharpening as an additional step. Jobs that use this feature incur pro-tier pricing. To not apply advanced input filtering: Choose Disabled. Note that you can still apply basic filtering with Deblock and Denoise.
|
|
3991
3991
|
* @public
|
|
3992
3992
|
*/
|
|
3993
|
-
AdvancedInputFilter?: AdvancedInputFilter;
|
|
3993
|
+
AdvancedInputFilter?: AdvancedInputFilter | undefined;
|
|
3994
3994
|
/**
|
|
3995
3995
|
* Optional settings for Advanced input filter when you set Advanced input filter to Enabled.
|
|
3996
3996
|
* @public
|
|
3997
3997
|
*/
|
|
3998
|
-
AdvancedInputFilterSettings?: AdvancedInputFilterSettings;
|
|
3998
|
+
AdvancedInputFilterSettings?: AdvancedInputFilterSettings | undefined;
|
|
3999
3999
|
/**
|
|
4000
4000
|
* Use audio selector groups to combine multiple sidecar audio inputs so that you can assign them to a single output audio tab. Note that, if you're working with embedded audio, it's simpler to assign multiple input tracks into a single audio selector rather than use an audio selector group.
|
|
4001
4001
|
* @public
|
|
4002
4002
|
*/
|
|
4003
|
-
AudioSelectorGroups?: Record<string, AudioSelectorGroup
|
|
4003
|
+
AudioSelectorGroups?: Record<string, AudioSelectorGroup> | undefined;
|
|
4004
4004
|
/**
|
|
4005
4005
|
* Use Audio selectors to specify a track or set of tracks from the input that you will use in your outputs. You can use multiple Audio selectors per input.
|
|
4006
4006
|
* @public
|
|
4007
4007
|
*/
|
|
4008
|
-
AudioSelectors?: Record<string, AudioSelector
|
|
4008
|
+
AudioSelectors?: Record<string, AudioSelector> | undefined;
|
|
4009
4009
|
/**
|
|
4010
4010
|
* Use captions selectors to specify the captions data from your input that you use in your outputs. You can use up to 100 captions selectors per input.
|
|
4011
4011
|
* @public
|
|
4012
4012
|
*/
|
|
4013
|
-
CaptionSelectors?: Record<string, CaptionSelector
|
|
4013
|
+
CaptionSelectors?: Record<string, CaptionSelector> | undefined;
|
|
4014
4014
|
/**
|
|
4015
4015
|
* Use Cropping selection to specify the video area that the service will include in the output video frame. If you specify a value here, it will override any value that you specify in the output setting Cropping selection.
|
|
4016
4016
|
* @public
|
|
4017
4017
|
*/
|
|
4018
|
-
Crop?: Rectangle;
|
|
4018
|
+
Crop?: Rectangle | undefined;
|
|
4019
4019
|
/**
|
|
4020
4020
|
* Enable Deblock to produce smoother motion in the output. Default is disabled. Only manually controllable for MPEG2 and uncompressed video inputs.
|
|
4021
4021
|
* @public
|
|
4022
4022
|
*/
|
|
4023
|
-
DeblockFilter?: InputDeblockFilter;
|
|
4023
|
+
DeblockFilter?: InputDeblockFilter | undefined;
|
|
4024
4024
|
/**
|
|
4025
4025
|
* Settings for decrypting any input files that you encrypt before you upload them to Amazon S3. MediaConvert can decrypt files only when you use AWS Key Management Service (KMS) to encrypt the data key that you use to encrypt your content.
|
|
4026
4026
|
* @public
|
|
4027
4027
|
*/
|
|
4028
|
-
DecryptionSettings?: InputDecryptionSettings;
|
|
4028
|
+
DecryptionSettings?: InputDecryptionSettings | undefined;
|
|
4029
4029
|
/**
|
|
4030
4030
|
* Enable Denoise to filter noise from the input. Default is disabled. Only applicable to MPEG2, H.264, H.265, and uncompressed video inputs.
|
|
4031
4031
|
* @public
|
|
4032
4032
|
*/
|
|
4033
|
-
DenoiseFilter?: InputDenoiseFilter;
|
|
4033
|
+
DenoiseFilter?: InputDenoiseFilter | undefined;
|
|
4034
4034
|
/**
|
|
4035
4035
|
* Use this setting only when your video source has Dolby Vision studio mastering metadata that is carried in a separate XML file. Specify the Amazon S3 location for the metadata XML file. MediaConvert uses this file to provide global and frame-level metadata for Dolby Vision preprocessing. When you specify a file here and your input also has interleaved global and frame level metadata, MediaConvert ignores the interleaved metadata and uses only the the metadata from this external XML file. Note that your IAM service role must grant MediaConvert read permissions to this file. For more information, see https://docs.aws.amazon.com/mediaconvert/latest/ug/iam-role.html.
|
|
4036
4036
|
* @public
|
|
4037
4037
|
*/
|
|
4038
|
-
DolbyVisionMetadataXml?: string;
|
|
4038
|
+
DolbyVisionMetadataXml?: string | undefined;
|
|
4039
4039
|
/**
|
|
4040
4040
|
* Specify the source file for your transcoding job. You can use multiple inputs in a single job. The service concatenates these inputs, in the order that you specify them in the job, to create the outputs. If your input format is IMF, specify your input by providing the path to your CPL. For example, "s3://bucket/vf/cpl.xml". If the CPL is in an incomplete IMP, make sure to use *Supplemental IMPs* to specify any supplemental IMPs that contain assets referenced by the CPL.
|
|
4041
4041
|
* @public
|
|
4042
4042
|
*/
|
|
4043
|
-
FileInput?: string;
|
|
4043
|
+
FileInput?: string | undefined;
|
|
4044
4044
|
/**
|
|
4045
4045
|
* Specify whether to apply input filtering to improve the video quality of your input. To apply filtering depending on your input type and quality: Choose Auto. To apply no filtering: Choose Disable. To apply filtering regardless of your input type and quality: Choose Force. When you do, you must also specify a value for Filter strength.
|
|
4046
4046
|
* @public
|
|
4047
4047
|
*/
|
|
4048
|
-
FilterEnable?: InputFilterEnable;
|
|
4048
|
+
FilterEnable?: InputFilterEnable | undefined;
|
|
4049
4049
|
/**
|
|
4050
4050
|
* Specify the strength of the input filter. To apply an automatic amount of filtering based the compression artifacts measured in your input: We recommend that you leave Filter strength blank and set Filter enable to Auto. To manually apply filtering: Enter a value from 1 to 5, where 1 is the least amount of filtering and 5 is the most. The value that you enter applies to the strength of the Deblock or Denoise filters, or to the strength of the Advanced input filter.
|
|
4051
4051
|
* @public
|
|
4052
4052
|
*/
|
|
4053
|
-
FilterStrength?: number;
|
|
4053
|
+
FilterStrength?: number | undefined;
|
|
4054
4054
|
/**
|
|
4055
4055
|
* Enable the image inserter feature to include a graphic overlay on your video. Enable or disable this feature for each input individually. This setting is disabled by default.
|
|
4056
4056
|
* @public
|
|
4057
4057
|
*/
|
|
4058
|
-
ImageInserter?: ImageInserter;
|
|
4058
|
+
ImageInserter?: ImageInserter | undefined;
|
|
4059
4059
|
/**
|
|
4060
4060
|
* Contains sets of start and end times that together specify a portion of the input to be used in the outputs. If you provide only a start time, the clip will be the entire input from that point to the end. If you provide only an end time, it will be the entire input up to that point. When you specify more than one input clip, the transcoding service creates the job outputs by stringing the clips together in the order you specify them.
|
|
4061
4061
|
* @public
|
|
4062
4062
|
*/
|
|
4063
|
-
InputClippings?: InputClipping[];
|
|
4063
|
+
InputClippings?: InputClipping[] | undefined;
|
|
4064
4064
|
/**
|
|
4065
4065
|
* When you have a progressive segmented frame (PsF) input, use this setting to flag the input as PsF. MediaConvert doesn't automatically detect PsF. Therefore, flagging your input as PsF results in better preservation of video quality when you do deinterlacing and frame rate conversion. If you don't specify, the default value is Auto. Auto is the correct setting for all inputs that are not PsF. Don't set this value to PsF when your input is interlaced. Doing so creates horizontal interlacing artifacts.
|
|
4066
4066
|
* @public
|
|
4067
4067
|
*/
|
|
4068
|
-
InputScanType?: InputScanType;
|
|
4068
|
+
InputScanType?: InputScanType | undefined;
|
|
4069
4069
|
/**
|
|
4070
4070
|
* Use Selection placement to define the video area in your output frame. The area outside of the rectangle that you specify here is black. If you specify a value here, it will override any value that you specify in the output setting Selection placement. If you specify a value here, this will override any AFD values in your input, even if you set Respond to AFD to Respond. If you specify a value here, this will ignore anything that you specify for the setting Scaling Behavior.
|
|
4071
4071
|
* @public
|
|
4072
4072
|
*/
|
|
4073
|
-
Position?: Rectangle;
|
|
4073
|
+
Position?: Rectangle | undefined;
|
|
4074
4074
|
/**
|
|
4075
4075
|
* Use Program to select a specific program from within a multi-program transport stream. Note that Quad 4K is not currently supported. Default is the first program within the transport stream. If the program you specify doesn't exist, the transcoding service will use this default.
|
|
4076
4076
|
* @public
|
|
4077
4077
|
*/
|
|
4078
|
-
ProgramNumber?: number;
|
|
4078
|
+
ProgramNumber?: number | undefined;
|
|
4079
4079
|
/**
|
|
4080
4080
|
* Set PSI control for transport stream inputs to specify which data the demux process to scans.
|
|
4081
4081
|
* * Ignore PSI - Scan all PIDs for audio and video.
|
|
4082
4082
|
* * Use PSI - Scan only PSI data.
|
|
4083
4083
|
* @public
|
|
4084
4084
|
*/
|
|
4085
|
-
PsiControl?: InputPsiControl;
|
|
4085
|
+
PsiControl?: InputPsiControl | undefined;
|
|
4086
4086
|
/**
|
|
4087
4087
|
* Provide a list of any necessary supplemental IMPs. You need supplemental IMPs if the CPL that you're using for your input is in an incomplete IMP. Specify either the supplemental IMP directories with a trailing slash or the ASSETMAP.xml files. For example ["s3://bucket/ov/", "s3://bucket/vf2/ASSETMAP.xml"]. You don't need to specify the IMP that contains your input CPL, because the service automatically detects it.
|
|
4088
4088
|
* @public
|
|
4089
4089
|
*/
|
|
4090
|
-
SupplementalImps?: string[];
|
|
4090
|
+
SupplementalImps?: string[] | undefined;
|
|
4091
4091
|
/**
|
|
4092
4092
|
* Use this Timecode source setting, located under the input settings, to specify how the service counts input video frames. This input frame count affects only the behavior of features that apply to a single input at a time, such as input clipping and synchronizing some captions formats. Choose Embedded to use the timecodes in your input video. Choose Start at zero to start the first frame at zero. Choose Specified start to start the first frame at the timecode that you specify in the setting Start timecode. If you don't specify a value for Timecode source, the service will use Embedded by default. For more information about timecodes, see https://docs.aws.amazon.com/console/mediaconvert/timecode.
|
|
4093
4093
|
* @public
|
|
4094
4094
|
*/
|
|
4095
|
-
TimecodeSource?: InputTimecodeSource;
|
|
4095
|
+
TimecodeSource?: InputTimecodeSource | undefined;
|
|
4096
4096
|
/**
|
|
4097
4097
|
* Specify the timecode that you want the service to use for this input's initial frame. To use this setting, you must set the Timecode source setting, located under the input settings, to Specified start. For more information about timecodes, see https://docs.aws.amazon.com/console/mediaconvert/timecode.
|
|
4098
4098
|
* @public
|
|
4099
4099
|
*/
|
|
4100
|
-
TimecodeStart?: string;
|
|
4100
|
+
TimecodeStart?: string | undefined;
|
|
4101
4101
|
/**
|
|
4102
4102
|
* When you include Video generator, MediaConvert creates a video input with black frames. Use this setting if you do not have a video input or if you want to add black video frames before, or after, other inputs. You can specify Video generator, or you can specify an Input file, but you cannot specify both. For more information, see https://docs.aws.amazon.com/mediaconvert/latest/ug/video-generator.html
|
|
4103
4103
|
* @public
|
|
4104
4104
|
*/
|
|
4105
|
-
VideoGenerator?: InputVideoGenerator;
|
|
4105
|
+
VideoGenerator?: InputVideoGenerator | undefined;
|
|
4106
4106
|
/**
|
|
4107
4107
|
* Contains an array of video overlays.
|
|
4108
4108
|
* @public
|
|
4109
4109
|
*/
|
|
4110
|
-
VideoOverlays?: VideoOverlay[];
|
|
4110
|
+
VideoOverlays?: VideoOverlay[] | undefined;
|
|
4111
4111
|
/**
|
|
4112
4112
|
* Input video selectors contain the video settings for the input. Each of your inputs can have up to one video selector.
|
|
4113
4113
|
* @public
|
|
4114
4114
|
*/
|
|
4115
|
-
VideoSelector?: VideoSelector;
|
|
4115
|
+
VideoSelector?: VideoSelector | undefined;
|
|
4116
4116
|
}
|
|
4117
4117
|
/**
|
|
4118
4118
|
* Specified video input in a template.
|
|
@@ -4123,109 +4123,109 @@ export interface InputTemplate {
|
|
|
4123
4123
|
* Use to remove noise, blocking, blurriness, or ringing from your input as a pre-filter step before encoding. The Advanced input filter removes more types of compression artifacts and is an improvement when compared to basic Deblock and Denoise filters. To remove video compression artifacts from your input and improve the video quality: Choose Enabled. Additionally, this filter can help increase the video quality of your output relative to its bitrate, since noisy inputs are more complex and require more bits to encode. To help restore loss of detail after applying the filter, you can optionally add texture or sharpening as an additional step. Jobs that use this feature incur pro-tier pricing. To not apply advanced input filtering: Choose Disabled. Note that you can still apply basic filtering with Deblock and Denoise.
|
|
4124
4124
|
* @public
|
|
4125
4125
|
*/
|
|
4126
|
-
AdvancedInputFilter?: AdvancedInputFilter;
|
|
4126
|
+
AdvancedInputFilter?: AdvancedInputFilter | undefined;
|
|
4127
4127
|
/**
|
|
4128
4128
|
* Optional settings for Advanced input filter when you set Advanced input filter to Enabled.
|
|
4129
4129
|
* @public
|
|
4130
4130
|
*/
|
|
4131
|
-
AdvancedInputFilterSettings?: AdvancedInputFilterSettings;
|
|
4131
|
+
AdvancedInputFilterSettings?: AdvancedInputFilterSettings | undefined;
|
|
4132
4132
|
/**
|
|
4133
4133
|
* Use audio selector groups to combine multiple sidecar audio inputs so that you can assign them to a single output audio tab. Note that, if you're working with embedded audio, it's simpler to assign multiple input tracks into a single audio selector rather than use an audio selector group.
|
|
4134
4134
|
* @public
|
|
4135
4135
|
*/
|
|
4136
|
-
AudioSelectorGroups?: Record<string, AudioSelectorGroup
|
|
4136
|
+
AudioSelectorGroups?: Record<string, AudioSelectorGroup> | undefined;
|
|
4137
4137
|
/**
|
|
4138
4138
|
* Use Audio selectors to specify a track or set of tracks from the input that you will use in your outputs. You can use multiple Audio selectors per input.
|
|
4139
4139
|
* @public
|
|
4140
4140
|
*/
|
|
4141
|
-
AudioSelectors?: Record<string, AudioSelector
|
|
4141
|
+
AudioSelectors?: Record<string, AudioSelector> | undefined;
|
|
4142
4142
|
/**
|
|
4143
4143
|
* Use captions selectors to specify the captions data from your input that you use in your outputs. You can use up to 100 captions selectors per input.
|
|
4144
4144
|
* @public
|
|
4145
4145
|
*/
|
|
4146
|
-
CaptionSelectors?: Record<string, CaptionSelector
|
|
4146
|
+
CaptionSelectors?: Record<string, CaptionSelector> | undefined;
|
|
4147
4147
|
/**
|
|
4148
4148
|
* Use Cropping selection to specify the video area that the service will include in the output video frame. If you specify a value here, it will override any value that you specify in the output setting Cropping selection.
|
|
4149
4149
|
* @public
|
|
4150
4150
|
*/
|
|
4151
|
-
Crop?: Rectangle;
|
|
4151
|
+
Crop?: Rectangle | undefined;
|
|
4152
4152
|
/**
|
|
4153
4153
|
* Enable Deblock to produce smoother motion in the output. Default is disabled. Only manually controllable for MPEG2 and uncompressed video inputs.
|
|
4154
4154
|
* @public
|
|
4155
4155
|
*/
|
|
4156
|
-
DeblockFilter?: InputDeblockFilter;
|
|
4156
|
+
DeblockFilter?: InputDeblockFilter | undefined;
|
|
4157
4157
|
/**
|
|
4158
4158
|
* Enable Denoise to filter noise from the input. Default is disabled. Only applicable to MPEG2, H.264, H.265, and uncompressed video inputs.
|
|
4159
4159
|
* @public
|
|
4160
4160
|
*/
|
|
4161
|
-
DenoiseFilter?: InputDenoiseFilter;
|
|
4161
|
+
DenoiseFilter?: InputDenoiseFilter | undefined;
|
|
4162
4162
|
/**
|
|
4163
4163
|
* Use this setting only when your video source has Dolby Vision studio mastering metadata that is carried in a separate XML file. Specify the Amazon S3 location for the metadata XML file. MediaConvert uses this file to provide global and frame-level metadata for Dolby Vision preprocessing. When you specify a file here and your input also has interleaved global and frame level metadata, MediaConvert ignores the interleaved metadata and uses only the the metadata from this external XML file. Note that your IAM service role must grant MediaConvert read permissions to this file. For more information, see https://docs.aws.amazon.com/mediaconvert/latest/ug/iam-role.html.
|
|
4164
4164
|
* @public
|
|
4165
4165
|
*/
|
|
4166
|
-
DolbyVisionMetadataXml?: string;
|
|
4166
|
+
DolbyVisionMetadataXml?: string | undefined;
|
|
4167
4167
|
/**
|
|
4168
4168
|
* Specify whether to apply input filtering to improve the video quality of your input. To apply filtering depending on your input type and quality: Choose Auto. To apply no filtering: Choose Disable. To apply filtering regardless of your input type and quality: Choose Force. When you do, you must also specify a value for Filter strength.
|
|
4169
4169
|
* @public
|
|
4170
4170
|
*/
|
|
4171
|
-
FilterEnable?: InputFilterEnable;
|
|
4171
|
+
FilterEnable?: InputFilterEnable | undefined;
|
|
4172
4172
|
/**
|
|
4173
4173
|
* Specify the strength of the input filter. To apply an automatic amount of filtering based the compression artifacts measured in your input: We recommend that you leave Filter strength blank and set Filter enable to Auto. To manually apply filtering: Enter a value from 1 to 5, where 1 is the least amount of filtering and 5 is the most. The value that you enter applies to the strength of the Deblock or Denoise filters, or to the strength of the Advanced input filter.
|
|
4174
4174
|
* @public
|
|
4175
4175
|
*/
|
|
4176
|
-
FilterStrength?: number;
|
|
4176
|
+
FilterStrength?: number | undefined;
|
|
4177
4177
|
/**
|
|
4178
4178
|
* Enable the image inserter feature to include a graphic overlay on your video. Enable or disable this feature for each input individually. This setting is disabled by default.
|
|
4179
4179
|
* @public
|
|
4180
4180
|
*/
|
|
4181
|
-
ImageInserter?: ImageInserter;
|
|
4181
|
+
ImageInserter?: ImageInserter | undefined;
|
|
4182
4182
|
/**
|
|
4183
4183
|
* Contains sets of start and end times that together specify a portion of the input to be used in the outputs. If you provide only a start time, the clip will be the entire input from that point to the end. If you provide only an end time, it will be the entire input up to that point. When you specify more than one input clip, the transcoding service creates the job outputs by stringing the clips together in the order you specify them.
|
|
4184
4184
|
* @public
|
|
4185
4185
|
*/
|
|
4186
|
-
InputClippings?: InputClipping[];
|
|
4186
|
+
InputClippings?: InputClipping[] | undefined;
|
|
4187
4187
|
/**
|
|
4188
4188
|
* When you have a progressive segmented frame (PsF) input, use this setting to flag the input as PsF. MediaConvert doesn't automatically detect PsF. Therefore, flagging your input as PsF results in better preservation of video quality when you do deinterlacing and frame rate conversion. If you don't specify, the default value is Auto. Auto is the correct setting for all inputs that are not PsF. Don't set this value to PsF when your input is interlaced. Doing so creates horizontal interlacing artifacts.
|
|
4189
4189
|
* @public
|
|
4190
4190
|
*/
|
|
4191
|
-
InputScanType?: InputScanType;
|
|
4191
|
+
InputScanType?: InputScanType | undefined;
|
|
4192
4192
|
/**
|
|
4193
4193
|
* Use Selection placement to define the video area in your output frame. The area outside of the rectangle that you specify here is black. If you specify a value here, it will override any value that you specify in the output setting Selection placement. If you specify a value here, this will override any AFD values in your input, even if you set Respond to AFD to Respond. If you specify a value here, this will ignore anything that you specify for the setting Scaling Behavior.
|
|
4194
4194
|
* @public
|
|
4195
4195
|
*/
|
|
4196
|
-
Position?: Rectangle;
|
|
4196
|
+
Position?: Rectangle | undefined;
|
|
4197
4197
|
/**
|
|
4198
4198
|
* Use Program to select a specific program from within a multi-program transport stream. Note that Quad 4K is not currently supported. Default is the first program within the transport stream. If the program you specify doesn't exist, the transcoding service will use this default.
|
|
4199
4199
|
* @public
|
|
4200
4200
|
*/
|
|
4201
|
-
ProgramNumber?: number;
|
|
4201
|
+
ProgramNumber?: number | undefined;
|
|
4202
4202
|
/**
|
|
4203
4203
|
* Set PSI control for transport stream inputs to specify which data the demux process to scans.
|
|
4204
4204
|
* * Ignore PSI - Scan all PIDs for audio and video.
|
|
4205
4205
|
* * Use PSI - Scan only PSI data.
|
|
4206
4206
|
* @public
|
|
4207
4207
|
*/
|
|
4208
|
-
PsiControl?: InputPsiControl;
|
|
4208
|
+
PsiControl?: InputPsiControl | undefined;
|
|
4209
4209
|
/**
|
|
4210
4210
|
* Use this Timecode source setting, located under the input settings, to specify how the service counts input video frames. This input frame count affects only the behavior of features that apply to a single input at a time, such as input clipping and synchronizing some captions formats. Choose Embedded to use the timecodes in your input video. Choose Start at zero to start the first frame at zero. Choose Specified start to start the first frame at the timecode that you specify in the setting Start timecode. If you don't specify a value for Timecode source, the service will use Embedded by default. For more information about timecodes, see https://docs.aws.amazon.com/console/mediaconvert/timecode.
|
|
4211
4211
|
* @public
|
|
4212
4212
|
*/
|
|
4213
|
-
TimecodeSource?: InputTimecodeSource;
|
|
4213
|
+
TimecodeSource?: InputTimecodeSource | undefined;
|
|
4214
4214
|
/**
|
|
4215
4215
|
* Specify the timecode that you want the service to use for this input's initial frame. To use this setting, you must set the Timecode source setting, located under the input settings, to Specified start. For more information about timecodes, see https://docs.aws.amazon.com/console/mediaconvert/timecode.
|
|
4216
4216
|
* @public
|
|
4217
4217
|
*/
|
|
4218
|
-
TimecodeStart?: string;
|
|
4218
|
+
TimecodeStart?: string | undefined;
|
|
4219
4219
|
/**
|
|
4220
4220
|
* Contains an array of video overlays.
|
|
4221
4221
|
* @public
|
|
4222
4222
|
*/
|
|
4223
|
-
VideoOverlays?: VideoOverlay[];
|
|
4223
|
+
VideoOverlays?: VideoOverlay[] | undefined;
|
|
4224
4224
|
/**
|
|
4225
4225
|
* Input video selectors contain the video settings for the input. Each of your inputs can have up to one video selector.
|
|
4226
4226
|
* @public
|
|
4227
4227
|
*/
|
|
4228
|
-
VideoSelector?: VideoSelector;
|
|
4228
|
+
VideoSelector?: VideoSelector | undefined;
|
|
4229
4229
|
}
|
|
4230
4230
|
/**
|
|
4231
4231
|
* @public
|
|
@@ -4301,12 +4301,12 @@ export interface JobMessages {
|
|
|
4301
4301
|
* List of messages that are informational only and don't indicate a problem with your job.
|
|
4302
4302
|
* @public
|
|
4303
4303
|
*/
|
|
4304
|
-
Info?: string[];
|
|
4304
|
+
Info?: string[] | undefined;
|
|
4305
4305
|
/**
|
|
4306
4306
|
* List of messages that warn about conditions that might cause your job not to run or to fail.
|
|
4307
4307
|
* @public
|
|
4308
4308
|
*/
|
|
4309
|
-
Warning?: string[];
|
|
4309
|
+
Warning?: string[] | undefined;
|
|
4310
4310
|
}
|
|
4311
4311
|
/**
|
|
4312
4312
|
* Contains details about the output's video stream
|
|
@@ -4317,12 +4317,12 @@ export interface VideoDetail {
|
|
|
4317
4317
|
* Height in pixels for the output
|
|
4318
4318
|
* @public
|
|
4319
4319
|
*/
|
|
4320
|
-
HeightInPx?: number;
|
|
4320
|
+
HeightInPx?: number | undefined;
|
|
4321
4321
|
/**
|
|
4322
4322
|
* Width in pixels for the output
|
|
4323
4323
|
* @public
|
|
4324
4324
|
*/
|
|
4325
|
-
WidthInPx?: number;
|
|
4325
|
+
WidthInPx?: number | undefined;
|
|
4326
4326
|
}
|
|
4327
4327
|
/**
|
|
4328
4328
|
* Details regarding output
|
|
@@ -4333,12 +4333,12 @@ export interface OutputDetail {
|
|
|
4333
4333
|
* Duration in milliseconds
|
|
4334
4334
|
* @public
|
|
4335
4335
|
*/
|
|
4336
|
-
DurationInMs?: number;
|
|
4336
|
+
DurationInMs?: number | undefined;
|
|
4337
4337
|
/**
|
|
4338
4338
|
* Contains details about the output's video stream
|
|
4339
4339
|
* @public
|
|
4340
4340
|
*/
|
|
4341
|
-
VideoDetails?: VideoDetail;
|
|
4341
|
+
VideoDetails?: VideoDetail | undefined;
|
|
4342
4342
|
}
|
|
4343
4343
|
/**
|
|
4344
4344
|
* Contains details about the output groups specified in the job settings.
|
|
@@ -4349,7 +4349,7 @@ export interface OutputGroupDetail {
|
|
|
4349
4349
|
* Details about the output
|
|
4350
4350
|
* @public
|
|
4351
4351
|
*/
|
|
4352
|
-
OutputDetails?: OutputDetail[];
|
|
4352
|
+
OutputDetails?: OutputDetail[] | undefined;
|
|
4353
4353
|
}
|
|
4354
4354
|
/**
|
|
4355
4355
|
* Description of the source and destination queues between which the job has moved, along with the timestamp of the move
|
|
@@ -4360,17 +4360,17 @@ export interface QueueTransition {
|
|
|
4360
4360
|
* The queue that the job was on after the transition.
|
|
4361
4361
|
* @public
|
|
4362
4362
|
*/
|
|
4363
|
-
DestinationQueue?: string;
|
|
4363
|
+
DestinationQueue?: string | undefined;
|
|
4364
4364
|
/**
|
|
4365
4365
|
* The queue that the job was on before the transition.
|
|
4366
4366
|
* @public
|
|
4367
4367
|
*/
|
|
4368
|
-
SourceQueue?: string;
|
|
4368
|
+
SourceQueue?: string | undefined;
|
|
4369
4369
|
/**
|
|
4370
4370
|
* The time, in Unix epoch format, that the job moved from the source queue to the destination queue.
|
|
4371
4371
|
* @public
|
|
4372
4372
|
*/
|
|
4373
|
-
Timestamp?: Date;
|
|
4373
|
+
Timestamp?: Date | undefined;
|
|
4374
4374
|
}
|
|
4375
4375
|
/**
|
|
4376
4376
|
* Use ad avail blanking settings to specify your output content during SCTE-35 triggered ad avails. You can blank your video or overlay it with an image. MediaConvert also removes any audio and embedded captions during the ad avail. For more information, see https://docs.aws.amazon.com/mediaconvert/latest/ug/ad-avail-blanking.html.
|
|
@@ -4381,7 +4381,7 @@ export interface AvailBlanking {
|
|
|
4381
4381
|
* Blanking image to be used. Leave empty for solid black. Only bmp and png images are supported.
|
|
4382
4382
|
* @public
|
|
4383
4383
|
*/
|
|
4384
|
-
AvailBlankingImage?: string;
|
|
4384
|
+
AvailBlankingImage?: string | undefined;
|
|
4385
4385
|
}
|
|
4386
4386
|
/**
|
|
4387
4387
|
* ESAM ManifestConfirmConditionNotification defined by OC-SP-ESAM-API-I03-131025.
|
|
@@ -4392,7 +4392,7 @@ export interface EsamManifestConfirmConditionNotification {
|
|
|
4392
4392
|
* Provide your ESAM ManifestConfirmConditionNotification XML document inside your JSON job settings. Form the XML document as per OC-SP-ESAM-API-I03-131025. The transcoder will use the Manifest Conditioning instructions in the message that you supply.
|
|
4393
4393
|
* @public
|
|
4394
4394
|
*/
|
|
4395
|
-
MccXml?: string;
|
|
4395
|
+
MccXml?: string | undefined;
|
|
4396
4396
|
}
|
|
4397
4397
|
/**
|
|
4398
4398
|
* ESAM SignalProcessingNotification data defined by OC-SP-ESAM-API-I03-131025.
|
|
@@ -4403,7 +4403,7 @@ export interface EsamSignalProcessingNotification {
|
|
|
4403
4403
|
* Provide your ESAM SignalProcessingNotification XML document inside your JSON job settings. Form the XML document as per OC-SP-ESAM-API-I03-131025. The transcoder will use the signal processing instructions in the message that you supply. For your MPEG2-TS file outputs, if you want the service to place SCTE-35 markers at the insertion points you specify in the XML document, you must also enable SCTE-35 ESAM. Note that you can either specify an ESAM XML document or enable SCTE-35 passthrough. You can't do both.
|
|
4404
4404
|
* @public
|
|
4405
4405
|
*/
|
|
4406
|
-
SccXml?: string;
|
|
4406
|
+
SccXml?: string | undefined;
|
|
4407
4407
|
}
|
|
4408
4408
|
/**
|
|
4409
4409
|
* Settings for Event Signaling And Messaging (ESAM). If you don't do ad insertion, you can ignore these settings.
|
|
@@ -4414,17 +4414,17 @@ export interface EsamSettings {
|
|
|
4414
4414
|
* Specifies an ESAM ManifestConfirmConditionNotification XML as per OC-SP-ESAM-API-I03-131025. The transcoder uses the manifest conditioning instructions that you provide in the setting MCC XML.
|
|
4415
4415
|
* @public
|
|
4416
4416
|
*/
|
|
4417
|
-
ManifestConfirmConditionNotification?: EsamManifestConfirmConditionNotification;
|
|
4417
|
+
ManifestConfirmConditionNotification?: EsamManifestConfirmConditionNotification | undefined;
|
|
4418
4418
|
/**
|
|
4419
4419
|
* Specifies the stream distance, in milliseconds, between the SCTE 35 messages that the transcoder places and the splice points that they refer to. If the time between the start of the asset and the SCTE-35 message is less than this value, then the transcoder places the SCTE-35 marker at the beginning of the stream.
|
|
4420
4420
|
* @public
|
|
4421
4421
|
*/
|
|
4422
|
-
ResponseSignalPreroll?: number;
|
|
4422
|
+
ResponseSignalPreroll?: number | undefined;
|
|
4423
4423
|
/**
|
|
4424
4424
|
* Specifies an ESAM SignalProcessingNotification XML as per OC-SP-ESAM-API-I03-131025. The transcoder uses the signal processing instructions that you provide in the setting SCC XML.
|
|
4425
4425
|
* @public
|
|
4426
4426
|
*/
|
|
4427
|
-
SignalProcessingNotification?: EsamSignalProcessingNotification;
|
|
4427
|
+
SignalProcessingNotification?: EsamSignalProcessingNotification | undefined;
|
|
4428
4428
|
}
|
|
4429
4429
|
/**
|
|
4430
4430
|
* @public
|
|
@@ -4459,12 +4459,12 @@ export interface ExtendedDataServices {
|
|
|
4459
4459
|
* The action to take on copy and redistribution control XDS packets. If you select PASSTHROUGH, packets will not be changed. If you select STRIP, any packets will be removed in output captions.
|
|
4460
4460
|
* @public
|
|
4461
4461
|
*/
|
|
4462
|
-
CopyProtectionAction?: CopyProtectionAction;
|
|
4462
|
+
CopyProtectionAction?: CopyProtectionAction | undefined;
|
|
4463
4463
|
/**
|
|
4464
4464
|
* The action to take on content advisory XDS packets. If you select PASSTHROUGH, packets will not be changed. If you select STRIP, any packets will be removed in output captions.
|
|
4465
4465
|
* @public
|
|
4466
4466
|
*/
|
|
4467
|
-
VchipAction?: VchipAction;
|
|
4467
|
+
VchipAction?: VchipAction | undefined;
|
|
4468
4468
|
}
|
|
4469
4469
|
/**
|
|
4470
4470
|
* Use these settings only when you use Kantar watermarking. Specify the values that MediaConvert uses to generate and place Kantar watermarks in your output audio. These settings apply to every output in your job. In addition to specifying these values, you also need to store your Kantar credentials in AWS Secrets Manager. For more information, see https://docs.aws.amazon.com/mediaconvert/latest/ug/kantar-watermarking.html.
|
|
@@ -4475,67 +4475,67 @@ export interface KantarWatermarkSettings {
|
|
|
4475
4475
|
* Provide an audio channel name from your Kantar audio license.
|
|
4476
4476
|
* @public
|
|
4477
4477
|
*/
|
|
4478
|
-
ChannelName?: string;
|
|
4478
|
+
ChannelName?: string | undefined;
|
|
4479
4479
|
/**
|
|
4480
4480
|
* Specify a unique identifier for Kantar to use for this piece of content.
|
|
4481
4481
|
* @public
|
|
4482
4482
|
*/
|
|
4483
|
-
ContentReference?: string;
|
|
4483
|
+
ContentReference?: string | undefined;
|
|
4484
4484
|
/**
|
|
4485
4485
|
* Provide the name of the AWS Secrets Manager secret where your Kantar credentials are stored. Note that your MediaConvert service role must provide access to this secret. For more information, see https://docs.aws.amazon.com/mediaconvert/latest/ug/granting-permissions-for-mediaconvert-to-access-secrets-manager-secret.html. For instructions on creating a secret, see https://docs.aws.amazon.com/secretsmanager/latest/userguide/tutorials_basic.html, in the AWS Secrets Manager User Guide.
|
|
4486
4486
|
* @public
|
|
4487
4487
|
*/
|
|
4488
|
-
CredentialsSecretName?: string;
|
|
4488
|
+
CredentialsSecretName?: string | undefined;
|
|
4489
4489
|
/**
|
|
4490
4490
|
* Optional. Specify an offset, in whole seconds, from the start of your output and the beginning of the watermarking. When you don't specify an offset, Kantar defaults to zero.
|
|
4491
4491
|
* @public
|
|
4492
4492
|
*/
|
|
4493
|
-
FileOffset?: number;
|
|
4493
|
+
FileOffset?: number | undefined;
|
|
4494
4494
|
/**
|
|
4495
4495
|
* Provide your Kantar license ID number. You should get this number from Kantar.
|
|
4496
4496
|
* @public
|
|
4497
4497
|
*/
|
|
4498
|
-
KantarLicenseId?: number;
|
|
4498
|
+
KantarLicenseId?: number | undefined;
|
|
4499
4499
|
/**
|
|
4500
4500
|
* Provide the HTTPS endpoint to the Kantar server. You should get this endpoint from Kantar.
|
|
4501
4501
|
* @public
|
|
4502
4502
|
*/
|
|
4503
|
-
KantarServerUrl?: string;
|
|
4503
|
+
KantarServerUrl?: string | undefined;
|
|
4504
4504
|
/**
|
|
4505
4505
|
* Optional. Specify the Amazon S3 bucket where you want MediaConvert to store your Kantar watermark XML logs. When you don't specify a bucket, MediaConvert doesn't save these logs. Note that your MediaConvert service role must provide access to this location. For more information, see https://docs.aws.amazon.com/mediaconvert/latest/ug/iam-role.html
|
|
4506
4506
|
* @public
|
|
4507
4507
|
*/
|
|
4508
|
-
LogDestination?: string;
|
|
4508
|
+
LogDestination?: string | undefined;
|
|
4509
4509
|
/**
|
|
4510
4510
|
* You can optionally use this field to specify the first timestamp that Kantar embeds during watermarking. Kantar suggests that you be very cautious when using this Kantar feature, and that you use it only on channels that are managed specifically for use with this feature by your Audience Measurement Operator. For more information about this feature, contact Kantar technical support.
|
|
4511
4511
|
* @public
|
|
4512
4512
|
*/
|
|
4513
|
-
Metadata3?: string;
|
|
4513
|
+
Metadata3?: string | undefined;
|
|
4514
4514
|
/**
|
|
4515
4515
|
* Additional metadata that MediaConvert sends to Kantar. Maximum length is 50 characters.
|
|
4516
4516
|
* @public
|
|
4517
4517
|
*/
|
|
4518
|
-
Metadata4?: string;
|
|
4518
|
+
Metadata4?: string | undefined;
|
|
4519
4519
|
/**
|
|
4520
4520
|
* Additional metadata that MediaConvert sends to Kantar. Maximum length is 50 characters.
|
|
4521
4521
|
* @public
|
|
4522
4522
|
*/
|
|
4523
|
-
Metadata5?: string;
|
|
4523
|
+
Metadata5?: string | undefined;
|
|
4524
4524
|
/**
|
|
4525
4525
|
* Additional metadata that MediaConvert sends to Kantar. Maximum length is 50 characters.
|
|
4526
4526
|
* @public
|
|
4527
4527
|
*/
|
|
4528
|
-
Metadata6?: string;
|
|
4528
|
+
Metadata6?: string | undefined;
|
|
4529
4529
|
/**
|
|
4530
4530
|
* Additional metadata that MediaConvert sends to Kantar. Maximum length is 50 characters.
|
|
4531
4531
|
* @public
|
|
4532
4532
|
*/
|
|
4533
|
-
Metadata7?: string;
|
|
4533
|
+
Metadata7?: string | undefined;
|
|
4534
4534
|
/**
|
|
4535
4535
|
* Additional metadata that MediaConvert sends to Kantar. Maximum length is 50 characters.
|
|
4536
4536
|
* @public
|
|
4537
4537
|
*/
|
|
4538
|
-
Metadata8?: string;
|
|
4538
|
+
Metadata8?: string | undefined;
|
|
4539
4539
|
}
|
|
4540
4540
|
/**
|
|
4541
4541
|
* For motion overlays that don't have a built-in frame rate, specify the frame rate of the overlay in frames per second, as a fraction. For example, specify 24 fps as 24/1. The overlay frame rate doesn't need to match the frame rate of the underlying video.
|
|
@@ -4546,12 +4546,12 @@ export interface MotionImageInsertionFramerate {
|
|
|
4546
4546
|
* The bottom of the fraction that expresses your overlay frame rate. For example, if your frame rate is 24 fps, set this value to 1.
|
|
4547
4547
|
* @public
|
|
4548
4548
|
*/
|
|
4549
|
-
FramerateDenominator?: number;
|
|
4549
|
+
FramerateDenominator?: number | undefined;
|
|
4550
4550
|
/**
|
|
4551
4551
|
* The top of the fraction that expresses your overlay frame rate. For example, if your frame rate is 24 fps, set this value to 24.
|
|
4552
4552
|
* @public
|
|
4553
4553
|
*/
|
|
4554
|
-
FramerateNumerator?: number;
|
|
4554
|
+
FramerateNumerator?: number | undefined;
|
|
4555
4555
|
}
|
|
4556
4556
|
/**
|
|
4557
4557
|
* @public
|
|
@@ -4574,12 +4574,12 @@ export interface MotionImageInsertionOffset {
|
|
|
4574
4574
|
* Set the distance, in pixels, between the overlay and the left edge of the video frame.
|
|
4575
4575
|
* @public
|
|
4576
4576
|
*/
|
|
4577
|
-
ImageX?: number;
|
|
4577
|
+
ImageX?: number | undefined;
|
|
4578
4578
|
/**
|
|
4579
4579
|
* Set the distance, in pixels, between the overlay and the top edge of the video frame.
|
|
4580
4580
|
* @public
|
|
4581
4581
|
*/
|
|
4582
|
-
ImageY?: number;
|
|
4582
|
+
ImageY?: number | undefined;
|
|
4583
4583
|
}
|
|
4584
4584
|
/**
|
|
4585
4585
|
* @public
|
|
@@ -4602,32 +4602,32 @@ export interface MotionImageInserter {
|
|
|
4602
4602
|
* If your motion graphic asset is a .mov file, keep this setting unspecified. If your motion graphic asset is a series of .png files, specify the frame rate of the overlay in frames per second, as a fraction. For example, specify 24 fps as 24/1. Make sure that the number of images in your series matches the frame rate and your intended overlay duration. For example, if you want a 30-second overlay at 30 fps, you should have 900 .png images. This overlay frame rate doesn't need to match the frame rate of the underlying video.
|
|
4603
4603
|
* @public
|
|
4604
4604
|
*/
|
|
4605
|
-
Framerate?: MotionImageInsertionFramerate;
|
|
4605
|
+
Framerate?: MotionImageInsertionFramerate | undefined;
|
|
4606
4606
|
/**
|
|
4607
4607
|
* Specify the .mov file or series of .png files that you want to overlay on your video. For .png files, provide the file name of the first file in the series. Make sure that the names of the .png files end with sequential numbers that specify the order that they are played in. For example, overlay_000.png, overlay_001.png, overlay_002.png, and so on. The sequence must start at zero, and each image file name must have the same number of digits. Pad your initial file names with enough zeros to complete the sequence. For example, if the first image is overlay_0.png, there can be only 10 images in the sequence, with the last image being overlay_9.png. But if the first image is overlay_00.png, there can be 100 images in the sequence.
|
|
4608
4608
|
* @public
|
|
4609
4609
|
*/
|
|
4610
|
-
Input?: string;
|
|
4610
|
+
Input?: string | undefined;
|
|
4611
4611
|
/**
|
|
4612
4612
|
* Choose the type of motion graphic asset that you are providing for your overlay. You can choose either a .mov file or a series of .png files.
|
|
4613
4613
|
* @public
|
|
4614
4614
|
*/
|
|
4615
|
-
InsertionMode?: MotionImageInsertionMode;
|
|
4615
|
+
InsertionMode?: MotionImageInsertionMode | undefined;
|
|
4616
4616
|
/**
|
|
4617
4617
|
* Use Offset to specify the placement of your motion graphic overlay on the video frame. Specify in pixels, from the upper-left corner of the frame. If you don't specify an offset, the service scales your overlay to the full size of the frame. Otherwise, the service inserts the overlay at its native resolution and scales the size up or down with any video scaling.
|
|
4618
4618
|
* @public
|
|
4619
4619
|
*/
|
|
4620
|
-
Offset?: MotionImageInsertionOffset;
|
|
4620
|
+
Offset?: MotionImageInsertionOffset | undefined;
|
|
4621
4621
|
/**
|
|
4622
4622
|
* Specify whether your motion graphic overlay repeats on a loop or plays only once.
|
|
4623
4623
|
* @public
|
|
4624
4624
|
*/
|
|
4625
|
-
Playback?: MotionImagePlayback;
|
|
4625
|
+
Playback?: MotionImagePlayback | undefined;
|
|
4626
4626
|
/**
|
|
4627
4627
|
* Specify when the motion overlay begins. Use timecode format (HH:MM:SS:FF or HH:MM:SS;FF). Make sure that the timecode you provide here takes into account how you have set up your timecode configuration under both job settings and input settings. The simplest way to do that is to set both to start at 0. If you need to set up your job to follow timecodes embedded in your source that don't start at zero, make sure that you specify a start time that is after the first embedded timecode. For more information, see https://docs.aws.amazon.com/mediaconvert/latest/ug/setting-up-timecode.html
|
|
4628
4628
|
* @public
|
|
4629
4629
|
*/
|
|
4630
|
-
StartTime?: string;
|
|
4630
|
+
StartTime?: string | undefined;
|
|
4631
4631
|
}
|
|
4632
4632
|
/**
|
|
4633
4633
|
* Settings for your Nielsen configuration. If you don't do Nielsen measurement and analytics, ignore these settings. When you enable Nielsen configuration, MediaConvert enables PCM to ID3 tagging for all outputs in the job.
|
|
@@ -4638,12 +4638,12 @@ export interface NielsenConfiguration {
|
|
|
4638
4638
|
* Nielsen has discontinued the use of breakout code functionality. If you must include this property, set the value to zero.
|
|
4639
4639
|
* @public
|
|
4640
4640
|
*/
|
|
4641
|
-
BreakoutCode?: number;
|
|
4641
|
+
BreakoutCode?: number | undefined;
|
|
4642
4642
|
/**
|
|
4643
4643
|
* Use Distributor ID to specify the distributor ID that is assigned to your organization by Nielsen.
|
|
4644
4644
|
* @public
|
|
4645
4645
|
*/
|
|
4646
|
-
DistributorId?: string;
|
|
4646
|
+
DistributorId?: string | undefined;
|
|
4647
4647
|
}
|
|
4648
4648
|
/**
|
|
4649
4649
|
* @public
|
|
@@ -4683,7 +4683,7 @@ export declare const NielsenUniqueTicPerAudioTrackType: {
|
|
|
4683
4683
|
*/
|
|
4684
4684
|
export type NielsenUniqueTicPerAudioTrackType = (typeof NielsenUniqueTicPerAudioTrackType)[keyof typeof NielsenUniqueTicPerAudioTrackType];
|
|
4685
4685
|
/**
|
|
4686
|
-
* Ignore these settings unless you are using Nielsen non-linear watermarking. Specify the values that MediaConvert uses to generate and place Nielsen watermarks in your output audio. In addition to specifying these values, you also need to set up your cloud TIC server. These settings apply to every output in your job. The MediaConvert implementation is currently with the following Nielsen versions: Nielsen Watermark SDK Version
|
|
4686
|
+
* Ignore these settings unless you are using Nielsen non-linear watermarking. Specify the values that MediaConvert uses to generate and place Nielsen watermarks in your output audio. In addition to specifying these values, you also need to set up your cloud TIC server. These settings apply to every output in your job. The MediaConvert implementation is currently with the following Nielsen versions: Nielsen Watermark SDK Version 6.0.13 Nielsen NLM Watermark Engine Version 1.3.3 Nielsen Watermark Authenticator [SID_TIC] Version [7.0.0]
|
|
4687
4687
|
* @public
|
|
4688
4688
|
*/
|
|
4689
4689
|
export interface NielsenNonLinearWatermarkSettings {
|
|
@@ -4691,57 +4691,57 @@ export interface NielsenNonLinearWatermarkSettings {
|
|
|
4691
4691
|
* Choose the type of Nielsen watermarks that you want in your outputs. When you choose NAES 2 and NW, you must provide a value for the setting SID. When you choose CBET, you must provide a value for the setting CSID. When you choose NAES 2, NW, and CBET, you must provide values for both of these settings.
|
|
4692
4692
|
* @public
|
|
4693
4693
|
*/
|
|
4694
|
-
ActiveWatermarkProcess?: NielsenActiveWatermarkProcessType;
|
|
4694
|
+
ActiveWatermarkProcess?: NielsenActiveWatermarkProcessType | undefined;
|
|
4695
4695
|
/**
|
|
4696
4696
|
* Optional. Use this setting when you want the service to include an ADI file in the Nielsen metadata .zip file. To provide an ADI file, store it in Amazon S3 and provide a URL to it here. The URL should be in the following format: S3://bucket/path/ADI-file. For more information about the metadata .zip file, see the setting Metadata destination.
|
|
4697
4697
|
* @public
|
|
4698
4698
|
*/
|
|
4699
|
-
AdiFilename?: string;
|
|
4699
|
+
AdiFilename?: string | undefined;
|
|
4700
4700
|
/**
|
|
4701
4701
|
* Use the asset ID that you provide to Nielsen to uniquely identify this asset. Required for all Nielsen non-linear watermarking.
|
|
4702
4702
|
* @public
|
|
4703
4703
|
*/
|
|
4704
|
-
AssetId?: string;
|
|
4704
|
+
AssetId?: string | undefined;
|
|
4705
4705
|
/**
|
|
4706
4706
|
* Use the asset name that you provide to Nielsen for this asset. Required for all Nielsen non-linear watermarking.
|
|
4707
4707
|
* @public
|
|
4708
4708
|
*/
|
|
4709
|
-
AssetName?: string;
|
|
4709
|
+
AssetName?: string | undefined;
|
|
4710
4710
|
/**
|
|
4711
4711
|
* Use the CSID that Nielsen provides to you. This CBET source ID should be unique to your Nielsen account but common to all of your output assets that have CBET watermarking. Required when you choose a value for the setting Watermark types that includes CBET.
|
|
4712
4712
|
* @public
|
|
4713
4713
|
*/
|
|
4714
|
-
CbetSourceId?: string;
|
|
4714
|
+
CbetSourceId?: string | undefined;
|
|
4715
4715
|
/**
|
|
4716
4716
|
* Optional. If this asset uses an episode ID with Nielsen, provide it here.
|
|
4717
4717
|
* @public
|
|
4718
4718
|
*/
|
|
4719
|
-
EpisodeId?: string;
|
|
4719
|
+
EpisodeId?: string | undefined;
|
|
4720
4720
|
/**
|
|
4721
4721
|
* Specify the Amazon S3 location where you want MediaConvert to save your Nielsen non-linear metadata .zip file. This Amazon S3 bucket must be in the same Region as the one where you do your MediaConvert transcoding. If you want to include an ADI file in this .zip file, use the setting ADI file to specify it. MediaConvert delivers the Nielsen metadata .zip files only to your metadata destination Amazon S3 bucket. It doesn't deliver the .zip files to Nielsen. You are responsible for delivering the metadata .zip files to Nielsen.
|
|
4722
4722
|
* @public
|
|
4723
4723
|
*/
|
|
4724
|
-
MetadataDestination?: string;
|
|
4724
|
+
MetadataDestination?: string | undefined;
|
|
4725
4725
|
/**
|
|
4726
4726
|
* Use the SID that Nielsen provides to you. This source ID should be unique to your Nielsen account but common to all of your output assets. Required for all Nielsen non-linear watermarking. This ID should be unique to your Nielsen account but common to all of your output assets. Required for all Nielsen non-linear watermarking.
|
|
4727
4727
|
* @public
|
|
4728
4728
|
*/
|
|
4729
|
-
SourceId?: number;
|
|
4729
|
+
SourceId?: number | undefined;
|
|
4730
4730
|
/**
|
|
4731
4731
|
* Required. Specify whether your source content already contains Nielsen non-linear watermarks. When you set this value to Watermarked, the service fails the job. Nielsen requires that you add non-linear watermarking to only clean content that doesn't already have non-linear Nielsen watermarks.
|
|
4732
4732
|
* @public
|
|
4733
4733
|
*/
|
|
4734
|
-
SourceWatermarkStatus?: NielsenSourceWatermarkStatusType;
|
|
4734
|
+
SourceWatermarkStatus?: NielsenSourceWatermarkStatusType | undefined;
|
|
4735
4735
|
/**
|
|
4736
4736
|
* Specify the endpoint for the TIC server that you have deployed and configured in the AWS Cloud. Required for all Nielsen non-linear watermarking. MediaConvert can't connect directly to a TIC server. Instead, you must use API Gateway to provide a RESTful interface between MediaConvert and a TIC server that you deploy in your AWS account. For more information on deploying a TIC server in your AWS account and the required API Gateway, contact Nielsen support.
|
|
4737
4737
|
* @public
|
|
4738
4738
|
*/
|
|
4739
|
-
TicServerUrl?: string;
|
|
4739
|
+
TicServerUrl?: string | undefined;
|
|
4740
4740
|
/**
|
|
4741
4741
|
* To create assets that have the same TIC values in each audio track, keep the default value Share TICs. To create assets that have unique TIC values for each audio track, choose Use unique TICs.
|
|
4742
4742
|
* @public
|
|
4743
4743
|
*/
|
|
4744
|
-
UniqueTicPerAudioTrack?: NielsenUniqueTicPerAudioTrackType;
|
|
4744
|
+
UniqueTicPerAudioTrack?: NielsenUniqueTicPerAudioTrackType | undefined;
|
|
4745
4745
|
}
|
|
4746
4746
|
/**
|
|
4747
4747
|
* Use automated ABR to have MediaConvert set up the renditions in your ABR package for you automatically, based on characteristics of your input video. This feature optimizes video quality while minimizing the overall size of your ABR package.
|
|
@@ -4752,22 +4752,22 @@ export interface AutomatedAbrSettings {
|
|
|
4752
4752
|
* Specify the maximum average bitrate for MediaConvert to use in your automated ABR stack. If you don't specify a value, MediaConvert uses 8,000,000 (8 mb/s) by default. The average bitrate of your highest-quality rendition will be equal to or below this value, depending on the quality, complexity, and resolution of your content. Note that the instantaneous maximum bitrate may vary above the value that you specify.
|
|
4753
4753
|
* @public
|
|
4754
4754
|
*/
|
|
4755
|
-
MaxAbrBitrate?: number;
|
|
4755
|
+
MaxAbrBitrate?: number | undefined;
|
|
4756
4756
|
/**
|
|
4757
4757
|
* Optional. The maximum number of renditions that MediaConvert will create in your automated ABR stack. The number of renditions is determined automatically, based on analysis of each job, but will never exceed this limit. When you set this to Auto in the console, which is equivalent to excluding it from your JSON job specification, MediaConvert defaults to a limit of 15.
|
|
4758
4758
|
* @public
|
|
4759
4759
|
*/
|
|
4760
|
-
MaxRenditions?: number;
|
|
4760
|
+
MaxRenditions?: number | undefined;
|
|
4761
4761
|
/**
|
|
4762
4762
|
* Specify the minimum average bitrate for MediaConvert to use in your automated ABR stack. If you don't specify a value, MediaConvert uses 600,000 (600 kb/s) by default. The average bitrate of your lowest-quality rendition will be near this value. Note that the instantaneous minimum bitrate may vary below the value that you specify.
|
|
4763
4763
|
* @public
|
|
4764
4764
|
*/
|
|
4765
|
-
MinAbrBitrate?: number;
|
|
4765
|
+
MinAbrBitrate?: number | undefined;
|
|
4766
4766
|
/**
|
|
4767
4767
|
* Optional. Use Automated ABR rules to specify restrictions for the rendition sizes MediaConvert will create in your ABR stack. You can use these rules if your ABR workflow has specific rendition size requirements, but you still want MediaConvert to optimize for video quality and overall file size.
|
|
4768
4768
|
* @public
|
|
4769
4769
|
*/
|
|
4770
|
-
Rules?: AutomatedAbrRule[];
|
|
4770
|
+
Rules?: AutomatedAbrRule[] | undefined;
|
|
4771
4771
|
}
|
|
4772
4772
|
/**
|
|
4773
4773
|
* Use automated encoding to have MediaConvert choose your encoding settings for you, based on characteristics of your input video.
|
|
@@ -4778,7 +4778,7 @@ export interface AutomatedEncodingSettings {
|
|
|
4778
4778
|
* Use automated ABR to have MediaConvert set up the renditions in your ABR package for you automatically, based on characteristics of your input video. This feature optimizes video quality while minimizing the overall size of your ABR package.
|
|
4779
4779
|
* @public
|
|
4780
4780
|
*/
|
|
4781
|
-
AbrSettings?: AutomatedAbrSettings;
|
|
4781
|
+
AbrSettings?: AutomatedAbrSettings | undefined;
|
|
4782
4782
|
}
|
|
4783
4783
|
/**
|
|
4784
4784
|
* @public
|
|
@@ -4840,7 +4840,7 @@ export interface S3DestinationAccessControl {
|
|
|
4840
4840
|
* Choose an Amazon S3 canned ACL for MediaConvert to apply to this output.
|
|
4841
4841
|
* @public
|
|
4842
4842
|
*/
|
|
4843
|
-
CannedAcl?: S3ObjectCannedAcl;
|
|
4843
|
+
CannedAcl?: S3ObjectCannedAcl | undefined;
|
|
4844
4844
|
}
|
|
4845
4845
|
/**
|
|
4846
4846
|
* @public
|
|
@@ -4863,17 +4863,17 @@ export interface S3EncryptionSettings {
|
|
|
4863
4863
|
* Specify how you want your data keys managed. AWS uses data keys to encrypt your content. AWS also encrypts the data keys themselves, using a customer master key (CMK), and then stores the encrypted data keys alongside your encrypted content. Use this setting to specify which AWS service manages the CMK. For simplest set up, choose Amazon S3. If you want your master key to be managed by AWS Key Management Service (KMS), choose AWS KMS. By default, when you choose AWS KMS, KMS uses the AWS managed customer master key (CMK) associated with Amazon S3 to encrypt your data keys. You can optionally choose to specify a different, customer managed CMK. Do so by specifying the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the key for the setting KMS ARN.
|
|
4864
4864
|
* @public
|
|
4865
4865
|
*/
|
|
4866
|
-
EncryptionType?: S3ServerSideEncryptionType;
|
|
4866
|
+
EncryptionType?: S3ServerSideEncryptionType | undefined;
|
|
4867
4867
|
/**
|
|
4868
4868
|
* Optionally, specify the encryption context that you want to use alongside your KMS key. AWS KMS uses this encryption context as additional authenticated data (AAD) to support authenticated encryption. This value must be a base64-encoded UTF-8 string holding JSON which represents a string-string map. To use this setting, you must also set Server-side encryption to AWS KMS. For more information about encryption context, see: https://docs.aws.amazon.com/kms/latest/developerguide/concepts.html#encrypt_context.
|
|
4869
4869
|
* @public
|
|
4870
4870
|
*/
|
|
4871
|
-
KmsEncryptionContext?: string;
|
|
4871
|
+
KmsEncryptionContext?: string | undefined;
|
|
4872
4872
|
/**
|
|
4873
4873
|
* Optionally, specify the customer master key (CMK) that you want to use to encrypt the data key that AWS uses to encrypt your output content. Enter the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the CMK. To use this setting, you must also set Server-side encryption to AWS KMS. If you set Server-side encryption to AWS KMS but don't specify a CMK here, AWS uses the AWS managed CMK associated with Amazon S3.
|
|
4874
4874
|
* @public
|
|
4875
4875
|
*/
|
|
4876
|
-
KmsKeyArn?: string;
|
|
4876
|
+
KmsKeyArn?: string | undefined;
|
|
4877
4877
|
}
|
|
4878
4878
|
/**
|
|
4879
4879
|
* @public
|
|
@@ -4901,17 +4901,17 @@ export interface S3DestinationSettings {
|
|
|
4901
4901
|
* Optional. Have MediaConvert automatically apply Amazon S3 access control for the outputs in this output group. When you don't use this setting, S3 automatically applies the default access control list PRIVATE.
|
|
4902
4902
|
* @public
|
|
4903
4903
|
*/
|
|
4904
|
-
AccessControl?: S3DestinationAccessControl;
|
|
4904
|
+
AccessControl?: S3DestinationAccessControl | undefined;
|
|
4905
4905
|
/**
|
|
4906
4906
|
* Settings for how your job outputs are encrypted as they are uploaded to Amazon S3.
|
|
4907
4907
|
* @public
|
|
4908
4908
|
*/
|
|
4909
|
-
Encryption?: S3EncryptionSettings;
|
|
4909
|
+
Encryption?: S3EncryptionSettings | undefined;
|
|
4910
4910
|
/**
|
|
4911
4911
|
* Specify the S3 storage class to use for this output. To use your destination's default storage class: Keep the default value, Not set. For more information about S3 storage classes, see https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AmazonS3/latest/userguide/storage-class-intro.html
|
|
4912
4912
|
* @public
|
|
4913
4913
|
*/
|
|
4914
|
-
StorageClass?: S3StorageClass;
|
|
4914
|
+
StorageClass?: S3StorageClass | undefined;
|
|
4915
4915
|
}
|
|
4916
4916
|
/**
|
|
4917
4917
|
* Settings associated with the destination. Will vary based on the type of destination
|
|
@@ -4922,7 +4922,7 @@ export interface DestinationSettings {
|
|
|
4922
4922
|
* Settings associated with S3 destination
|
|
4923
4923
|
* @public
|
|
4924
4924
|
*/
|
|
4925
|
-
S3Settings?: S3DestinationSettings;
|
|
4925
|
+
S3Settings?: S3DestinationSettings | undefined;
|
|
4926
4926
|
}
|
|
4927
4927
|
/**
|
|
4928
4928
|
* @public
|
|
@@ -4992,12 +4992,12 @@ export interface EncryptionContractConfiguration {
|
|
|
4992
4992
|
* Specify which SPEKE version 2.0 audio preset MediaConvert uses to request content keys from your SPEKE server. For more information, see: https://docs.aws.amazon.com/mediaconvert/latest/ug/drm-content-speke-v2-presets.html To encrypt to your audio outputs, choose from the following: Audio preset 1, Audio preset 2, or Audio preset 3. To encrypt your audio outputs, using the same content key for both your audio and video outputs: Choose Shared. When you do, you must also set SPEKE v2.0 video preset to Shared. To not encrypt your audio outputs: Choose Unencrypted. When you do, to encrypt your video outputs, you must also specify a SPEKE v2.0 video preset (other than Shared or Unencrypted).
|
|
4993
4993
|
* @public
|
|
4994
4994
|
*/
|
|
4995
|
-
SpekeAudioPreset?: PresetSpeke20Audio;
|
|
4995
|
+
SpekeAudioPreset?: PresetSpeke20Audio | undefined;
|
|
4996
4996
|
/**
|
|
4997
4997
|
* Specify which SPEKE version 2.0 video preset MediaConvert uses to request content keys from your SPEKE server. For more information, see: https://docs.aws.amazon.com/mediaconvert/latest/ug/drm-content-speke-v2-presets.html To encrypt to your video outputs, choose from the following: Video preset 1, Video preset 2, Video preset 3, Video preset 4, Video preset 5, Video preset 6, Video preset 7, or Video preset 8. To encrypt your video outputs, using the same content key for both your video and audio outputs: Choose Shared. When you do, you must also set SPEKE v2.0 audio preset to Shared. To not encrypt your video outputs: Choose Unencrypted. When you do, to encrypt your audio outputs, you must also specify a SPEKE v2.0 audio preset (other than Shared or Unencrypted).
|
|
4998
4998
|
* @public
|
|
4999
4999
|
*/
|
|
5000
|
-
SpekeVideoPreset?: PresetSpeke20Video;
|
|
5000
|
+
SpekeVideoPreset?: PresetSpeke20Video | undefined;
|
|
5001
5001
|
}
|
|
5002
5002
|
/**
|
|
5003
5003
|
* If your output group type is CMAF, use these settings when doing DRM encryption with a SPEKE-compliant key provider. If your output group type is HLS, DASH, or Microsoft Smooth, use the SpekeKeyProvider settings instead.
|
|
@@ -5008,32 +5008,32 @@ export interface SpekeKeyProviderCmaf {
|
|
|
5008
5008
|
* If you want your key provider to encrypt the content keys that it provides to MediaConvert, set up a certificate with a master key using AWS Certificate Manager. Specify the certificate's Amazon Resource Name (ARN) here.
|
|
5009
5009
|
* @public
|
|
5010
5010
|
*/
|
|
5011
|
-
CertificateArn?: string;
|
|
5011
|
+
CertificateArn?: string | undefined;
|
|
5012
5012
|
/**
|
|
5013
5013
|
* Specify the DRM system IDs that you want signaled in the DASH manifest that MediaConvert creates as part of this CMAF package. The DASH manifest can currently signal up to three system IDs. For more information, see https://dashif.org/identifiers/content_protection/.
|
|
5014
5014
|
* @public
|
|
5015
5015
|
*/
|
|
5016
|
-
DashSignaledSystemIds?: string[];
|
|
5016
|
+
DashSignaledSystemIds?: string[] | undefined;
|
|
5017
5017
|
/**
|
|
5018
5018
|
* Specify the SPEKE version, either v1.0 or v2.0, that MediaConvert uses when encrypting your output. For more information, see: https://docs.aws.amazon.com/speke/latest/documentation/speke-api-specification.html To use SPEKE v1.0: Leave blank. To use SPEKE v2.0: Specify a SPEKE v2.0 video preset and a SPEKE v2.0 audio preset.
|
|
5019
5019
|
* @public
|
|
5020
5020
|
*/
|
|
5021
|
-
EncryptionContractConfiguration?: EncryptionContractConfiguration;
|
|
5021
|
+
EncryptionContractConfiguration?: EncryptionContractConfiguration | undefined;
|
|
5022
5022
|
/**
|
|
5023
5023
|
* Specify the DRM system ID that you want signaled in the HLS manifest that MediaConvert creates as part of this CMAF package. The HLS manifest can currently signal only one system ID. For more information, see https://dashif.org/identifiers/content_protection/.
|
|
5024
5024
|
* @public
|
|
5025
5025
|
*/
|
|
5026
|
-
HlsSignaledSystemIds?: string[];
|
|
5026
|
+
HlsSignaledSystemIds?: string[] | undefined;
|
|
5027
5027
|
/**
|
|
5028
5028
|
* Specify the resource ID that your SPEKE-compliant key provider uses to identify this content.
|
|
5029
5029
|
* @public
|
|
5030
5030
|
*/
|
|
5031
|
-
ResourceId?: string;
|
|
5031
|
+
ResourceId?: string | undefined;
|
|
5032
5032
|
/**
|
|
5033
5033
|
* Specify the URL to the key server that your SPEKE-compliant DRM key provider uses to provide keys for encrypting your content.
|
|
5034
5034
|
* @public
|
|
5035
5035
|
*/
|
|
5036
|
-
Url?: string;
|
|
5036
|
+
Url?: string | undefined;
|
|
5037
5037
|
}
|
|
5038
5038
|
/**
|
|
5039
5039
|
* Use these settings to set up encryption with a static key provider.
|
|
@@ -5044,22 +5044,22 @@ export interface StaticKeyProvider {
|
|
|
5044
5044
|
* Relates to DRM implementation. Sets the value of the KEYFORMAT attribute. Must be 'identity' or a reverse DNS string. May be omitted to indicate an implicit value of 'identity'.
|
|
5045
5045
|
* @public
|
|
5046
5046
|
*/
|
|
5047
|
-
KeyFormat?: string;
|
|
5047
|
+
KeyFormat?: string | undefined;
|
|
5048
5048
|
/**
|
|
5049
5049
|
* Relates to DRM implementation. Either a single positive integer version value or a slash delimited list of version values (1/2/3).
|
|
5050
5050
|
* @public
|
|
5051
5051
|
*/
|
|
5052
|
-
KeyFormatVersions?: string;
|
|
5052
|
+
KeyFormatVersions?: string | undefined;
|
|
5053
5053
|
/**
|
|
5054
5054
|
* Relates to DRM implementation. Use a 32-character hexidecimal string to specify Key Value.
|
|
5055
5055
|
* @public
|
|
5056
5056
|
*/
|
|
5057
|
-
StaticKeyValue?: string;
|
|
5057
|
+
StaticKeyValue?: string | undefined;
|
|
5058
5058
|
/**
|
|
5059
5059
|
* Relates to DRM implementation. The location of the license server used for protecting content.
|
|
5060
5060
|
* @public
|
|
5061
5061
|
*/
|
|
5062
|
-
Url?: string;
|
|
5062
|
+
Url?: string | undefined;
|
|
5063
5063
|
}
|
|
5064
5064
|
/**
|
|
5065
5065
|
* @public
|
|
@@ -5082,32 +5082,32 @@ export interface CmafEncryptionSettings {
|
|
|
5082
5082
|
* This is a 128-bit, 16-byte hex value represented by a 32-character text string. If this parameter is not set then the Initialization Vector will follow the segment number by default.
|
|
5083
5083
|
* @public
|
|
5084
5084
|
*/
|
|
5085
|
-
ConstantInitializationVector?: string;
|
|
5085
|
+
ConstantInitializationVector?: string | undefined;
|
|
5086
5086
|
/**
|
|
5087
5087
|
* Specify the encryption scheme that you want the service to use when encrypting your CMAF segments. Choose AES-CBC subsample or AES_CTR.
|
|
5088
5088
|
* @public
|
|
5089
5089
|
*/
|
|
5090
|
-
EncryptionMethod?: CmafEncryptionType;
|
|
5090
|
+
EncryptionMethod?: CmafEncryptionType | undefined;
|
|
5091
5091
|
/**
|
|
5092
5092
|
* When you use DRM with CMAF outputs, choose whether the service writes the 128-bit encryption initialization vector in the HLS and DASH manifests.
|
|
5093
5093
|
* @public
|
|
5094
5094
|
*/
|
|
5095
|
-
InitializationVectorInManifest?: CmafInitializationVectorInManifest;
|
|
5095
|
+
InitializationVectorInManifest?: CmafInitializationVectorInManifest | undefined;
|
|
5096
5096
|
/**
|
|
5097
5097
|
* If your output group type is CMAF, use these settings when doing DRM encryption with a SPEKE-compliant key provider. If your output group type is HLS, DASH, or Microsoft Smooth, use the SpekeKeyProvider settings instead.
|
|
5098
5098
|
* @public
|
|
5099
5099
|
*/
|
|
5100
|
-
SpekeKeyProvider?: SpekeKeyProviderCmaf;
|
|
5100
|
+
SpekeKeyProvider?: SpekeKeyProviderCmaf | undefined;
|
|
5101
5101
|
/**
|
|
5102
5102
|
* Use these settings to set up encryption with a static key provider.
|
|
5103
5103
|
* @public
|
|
5104
5104
|
*/
|
|
5105
|
-
StaticKeyProvider?: StaticKeyProvider;
|
|
5105
|
+
StaticKeyProvider?: StaticKeyProvider | undefined;
|
|
5106
5106
|
/**
|
|
5107
5107
|
* Specify whether your DRM encryption key is static or from a key provider that follows the SPEKE standard. For more information about SPEKE, see https://docs.aws.amazon.com/speke/latest/documentation/what-is-speke.html.
|
|
5108
5108
|
* @public
|
|
5109
5109
|
*/
|
|
5110
|
-
Type?: CmafKeyProviderType;
|
|
5110
|
+
Type?: CmafKeyProviderType | undefined;
|
|
5111
5111
|
}
|
|
5112
5112
|
/**
|
|
5113
5113
|
* @public
|
|
@@ -5144,32 +5144,32 @@ export interface CmafImageBasedTrickPlaySettings {
|
|
|
5144
5144
|
* The cadence MediaConvert follows for generating thumbnails. If set to FOLLOW_IFRAME, MediaConvert generates thumbnails for each IDR frame in the output (matching the GOP cadence). If set to FOLLOW_CUSTOM, MediaConvert generates thumbnails according to the interval you specify in thumbnailInterval.
|
|
5145
5145
|
* @public
|
|
5146
5146
|
*/
|
|
5147
|
-
IntervalCadence?: CmafIntervalCadence;
|
|
5147
|
+
IntervalCadence?: CmafIntervalCadence | undefined;
|
|
5148
5148
|
/**
|
|
5149
5149
|
* Height of each thumbnail within each tile image, in pixels. Leave blank to maintain aspect ratio with thumbnail width. If following the aspect ratio would lead to a total tile height greater than 4096, then the job will be rejected. Must be divisible by 2.
|
|
5150
5150
|
* @public
|
|
5151
5151
|
*/
|
|
5152
|
-
ThumbnailHeight?: number;
|
|
5152
|
+
ThumbnailHeight?: number | undefined;
|
|
5153
5153
|
/**
|
|
5154
5154
|
* Enter the interval, in seconds, that MediaConvert uses to generate thumbnails. If the interval you enter doesn't align with the output frame rate, MediaConvert automatically rounds the interval to align with the output frame rate. For example, if the output frame rate is 29.97 frames per second and you enter 5, MediaConvert uses a 150 frame interval to generate thumbnails.
|
|
5155
5155
|
* @public
|
|
5156
5156
|
*/
|
|
5157
|
-
ThumbnailInterval?: number;
|
|
5157
|
+
ThumbnailInterval?: number | undefined;
|
|
5158
5158
|
/**
|
|
5159
5159
|
* Width of each thumbnail within each tile image, in pixels. Default is 312. Must be divisible by 8.
|
|
5160
5160
|
* @public
|
|
5161
5161
|
*/
|
|
5162
|
-
ThumbnailWidth?: number;
|
|
5162
|
+
ThumbnailWidth?: number | undefined;
|
|
5163
5163
|
/**
|
|
5164
5164
|
* Number of thumbnails in each column of a tile image. Set a value between 2 and 2048. Must be divisible by 2.
|
|
5165
5165
|
* @public
|
|
5166
5166
|
*/
|
|
5167
|
-
TileHeight?: number;
|
|
5167
|
+
TileHeight?: number | undefined;
|
|
5168
5168
|
/**
|
|
5169
5169
|
* Number of thumbnails in each row of a tile image. Set a value between 1 and 512.
|
|
5170
5170
|
* @public
|
|
5171
5171
|
*/
|
|
5172
|
-
TileWidth?: number;
|
|
5172
|
+
TileWidth?: number | undefined;
|
|
5173
5173
|
}
|
|
5174
5174
|
/**
|
|
5175
5175
|
* @public
|
|
@@ -5336,142 +5336,142 @@ export interface CmafGroupSettings {
|
|
|
5336
5336
|
* By default, the service creates one top-level .m3u8 HLS manifest and one top -level .mpd DASH manifest for each CMAF output group in your job. These default manifests reference every output in the output group. To create additional top-level manifests that reference a subset of the outputs in the output group, specify a list of them here. For each additional manifest that you specify, the service creates one HLS manifest and one DASH manifest.
|
|
5337
5337
|
* @public
|
|
5338
5338
|
*/
|
|
5339
|
-
AdditionalManifests?: CmafAdditionalManifest[];
|
|
5339
|
+
AdditionalManifests?: CmafAdditionalManifest[] | undefined;
|
|
5340
5340
|
/**
|
|
5341
5341
|
* A partial URI prefix that will be put in the manifest file at the top level BaseURL element. Can be used if streams are delivered from a different URL than the manifest file.
|
|
5342
5342
|
* @public
|
|
5343
5343
|
*/
|
|
5344
|
-
BaseUrl?: string;
|
|
5344
|
+
BaseUrl?: string | undefined;
|
|
5345
5345
|
/**
|
|
5346
5346
|
* Disable this setting only when your workflow requires the #EXT-X-ALLOW-CACHE:no tag. Otherwise, keep the default value Enabled and control caching in your video distribution set up. For example, use the Cache-Control http header.
|
|
5347
5347
|
* @public
|
|
5348
5348
|
*/
|
|
5349
|
-
ClientCache?: CmafClientCache;
|
|
5349
|
+
ClientCache?: CmafClientCache | undefined;
|
|
5350
5350
|
/**
|
|
5351
5351
|
* Specification to use (RFC-6381 or the default RFC-4281) during m3u8 playlist generation.
|
|
5352
5352
|
* @public
|
|
5353
5353
|
*/
|
|
5354
|
-
CodecSpecification?: CmafCodecSpecification;
|
|
5354
|
+
CodecSpecification?: CmafCodecSpecification | undefined;
|
|
5355
5355
|
/**
|
|
5356
5356
|
* Specify whether MediaConvert generates I-frame only video segments for DASH trick play, also known as trick mode. When specified, the I-frame only video segments are included within an additional AdaptationSet in your DASH output manifest. To generate I-frame only video segments: Enter a name as a text string, up to 256 character long. This name is appended to the end of this output group's base filename, that you specify as part of your destination URI, and used for the I-frame only video segment files. You may also include format identifiers. For more information, see: https://docs.aws.amazon.com/mediaconvert/latest/ug/using-variables-in-your-job-settings.html#using-settings-variables-with-streaming-outputs To not generate I-frame only video segments: Leave blank.
|
|
5357
5357
|
* @public
|
|
5358
5358
|
*/
|
|
5359
|
-
DashIFrameTrickPlayNameModifier?: string;
|
|
5359
|
+
DashIFrameTrickPlayNameModifier?: string | undefined;
|
|
5360
5360
|
/**
|
|
5361
5361
|
* Specify how MediaConvert writes SegmentTimeline in your output DASH manifest. To write a SegmentTimeline in each video Representation: Keep the default value, Basic. To write a common SegmentTimeline in the video AdaptationSet: Choose Compact. Note that MediaConvert will still write a SegmentTimeline in any Representation that does not share a common timeline. To write a video AdaptationSet for each different output framerate, and a common SegmentTimeline in each AdaptationSet: Choose Distinct.
|
|
5362
5362
|
* @public
|
|
5363
5363
|
*/
|
|
5364
|
-
DashManifestStyle?: DashManifestStyle;
|
|
5364
|
+
DashManifestStyle?: DashManifestStyle | undefined;
|
|
5365
5365
|
/**
|
|
5366
5366
|
* Use Destination to specify the S3 output location and the output filename base. Destination accepts format identifiers. If you do not specify the base filename in the URI, the service will use the filename of the input file. If your job has multiple inputs, the service uses the filename of the first input file.
|
|
5367
5367
|
* @public
|
|
5368
5368
|
*/
|
|
5369
|
-
Destination?: string;
|
|
5369
|
+
Destination?: string | undefined;
|
|
5370
5370
|
/**
|
|
5371
5371
|
* Settings associated with the destination. Will vary based on the type of destination
|
|
5372
5372
|
* @public
|
|
5373
5373
|
*/
|
|
5374
|
-
DestinationSettings?: DestinationSettings;
|
|
5374
|
+
DestinationSettings?: DestinationSettings | undefined;
|
|
5375
5375
|
/**
|
|
5376
5376
|
* DRM settings.
|
|
5377
5377
|
* @public
|
|
5378
5378
|
*/
|
|
5379
|
-
Encryption?: CmafEncryptionSettings;
|
|
5379
|
+
Encryption?: CmafEncryptionSettings | undefined;
|
|
5380
5380
|
/**
|
|
5381
5381
|
* Specify the length, in whole seconds, of the mp4 fragments. When you don't specify a value, MediaConvert defaults to 2. Related setting: Use Fragment length control to specify whether the encoder enforces this value strictly.
|
|
5382
5382
|
* @public
|
|
5383
5383
|
*/
|
|
5384
|
-
FragmentLength?: number;
|
|
5384
|
+
FragmentLength?: number | undefined;
|
|
5385
5385
|
/**
|
|
5386
5386
|
* Specify whether MediaConvert generates images for trick play. Keep the default value, None, to not generate any images. Choose Thumbnail to generate tiled thumbnails. Choose Thumbnail and full frame to generate tiled thumbnails and full-resolution images of single frames. When you enable Write HLS manifest, MediaConvert creates a child manifest for each set of images that you generate and adds corresponding entries to the parent manifest. When you enable Write DASH manifest, MediaConvert adds an entry in the .mpd manifest for each set of images that you generate. A common application for these images is Roku trick mode. The thumbnails and full-frame images that MediaConvert creates with this feature are compatible with this Roku specification: https://developer.roku.com/docs/developer-program/media-playback/trick-mode/hls-and-dash.md
|
|
5387
5387
|
* @public
|
|
5388
5388
|
*/
|
|
5389
|
-
ImageBasedTrickPlay?: CmafImageBasedTrickPlay;
|
|
5389
|
+
ImageBasedTrickPlay?: CmafImageBasedTrickPlay | undefined;
|
|
5390
5390
|
/**
|
|
5391
5391
|
* Tile and thumbnail settings applicable when imageBasedTrickPlay is ADVANCED
|
|
5392
5392
|
* @public
|
|
5393
5393
|
*/
|
|
5394
|
-
ImageBasedTrickPlaySettings?: CmafImageBasedTrickPlaySettings;
|
|
5394
|
+
ImageBasedTrickPlaySettings?: CmafImageBasedTrickPlaySettings | undefined;
|
|
5395
5395
|
/**
|
|
5396
5396
|
* When set to GZIP, compresses HLS playlist.
|
|
5397
5397
|
* @public
|
|
5398
5398
|
*/
|
|
5399
|
-
ManifestCompression?: CmafManifestCompression;
|
|
5399
|
+
ManifestCompression?: CmafManifestCompression | undefined;
|
|
5400
5400
|
/**
|
|
5401
5401
|
* Indicates whether the output manifest should use floating point values for segment duration.
|
|
5402
5402
|
* @public
|
|
5403
5403
|
*/
|
|
5404
|
-
ManifestDurationFormat?: CmafManifestDurationFormat;
|
|
5404
|
+
ManifestDurationFormat?: CmafManifestDurationFormat | undefined;
|
|
5405
5405
|
/**
|
|
5406
5406
|
* Minimum time of initially buffered media that is needed to ensure smooth playout.
|
|
5407
5407
|
* @public
|
|
5408
5408
|
*/
|
|
5409
|
-
MinBufferTime?: number;
|
|
5409
|
+
MinBufferTime?: number | undefined;
|
|
5410
5410
|
/**
|
|
5411
5411
|
* Keep this setting at the default value of 0, unless you are troubleshooting a problem with how devices play back the end of your video asset. If you know that player devices are hanging on the final segment of your video because the length of your final segment is too short, use this setting to specify a minimum final segment length, in seconds. Choose a value that is greater than or equal to 1 and less than your segment length. When you specify a value for this setting, the encoder will combine any final segment that is shorter than the length that you specify with the previous segment. For example, your segment length is 3 seconds and your final segment is .5 seconds without a minimum final segment length; when you set the minimum final segment length to 1, your final segment is 3.5 seconds.
|
|
5412
5412
|
* @public
|
|
5413
5413
|
*/
|
|
5414
|
-
MinFinalSegmentLength?: number;
|
|
5414
|
+
MinFinalSegmentLength?: number | undefined;
|
|
5415
5415
|
/**
|
|
5416
5416
|
* Specify how the value for bandwidth is determined for each video Representation in your output MPD manifest. We recommend that you choose a MPD manifest bandwidth type that is compatible with your downstream player configuration. Max: Use the same value that you specify for Max bitrate in the video output, in bits per second. Average: Use the calculated average bitrate of the encoded video output, in bits per second.
|
|
5417
5417
|
* @public
|
|
5418
5418
|
*/
|
|
5419
|
-
MpdManifestBandwidthType?: CmafMpdManifestBandwidthType;
|
|
5419
|
+
MpdManifestBandwidthType?: CmafMpdManifestBandwidthType | undefined;
|
|
5420
5420
|
/**
|
|
5421
5421
|
* Specify whether your DASH profile is on-demand or main. When you choose Main profile, the service signals urn:mpeg:dash:profile:isoff-main:2011 in your .mpd DASH manifest. When you choose On-demand, the service signals urn:mpeg:dash:profile:isoff-on-demand:2011 in your .mpd. When you choose On-demand, you must also set the output group setting Segment control to Single file.
|
|
5422
5422
|
* @public
|
|
5423
5423
|
*/
|
|
5424
|
-
MpdProfile?: CmafMpdProfile;
|
|
5424
|
+
MpdProfile?: CmafMpdProfile | undefined;
|
|
5425
5425
|
/**
|
|
5426
5426
|
* Use this setting only when your output video stream has B-frames, which causes the initial presentation time stamp (PTS) to be offset from the initial decode time stamp (DTS). Specify how MediaConvert handles PTS when writing time stamps in output DASH manifests. Choose Match initial PTS when you want MediaConvert to use the initial PTS as the first time stamp in the manifest. Choose Zero-based to have MediaConvert ignore the initial PTS in the video stream and instead write the initial time stamp as zero in the manifest. For outputs that don't have B-frames, the time stamps in your DASH manifests start at zero regardless of your choice here.
|
|
5427
5427
|
* @public
|
|
5428
5428
|
*/
|
|
5429
|
-
PtsOffsetHandlingForBFrames?: CmafPtsOffsetHandlingForBFrames;
|
|
5429
|
+
PtsOffsetHandlingForBFrames?: CmafPtsOffsetHandlingForBFrames | undefined;
|
|
5430
5430
|
/**
|
|
5431
5431
|
* When set to SINGLE_FILE, a single output file is generated, which is internally segmented using the Fragment Length and Segment Length. When set to SEGMENTED_FILES, separate segment files will be created.
|
|
5432
5432
|
* @public
|
|
5433
5433
|
*/
|
|
5434
|
-
SegmentControl?: CmafSegmentControl;
|
|
5434
|
+
SegmentControl?: CmafSegmentControl | undefined;
|
|
5435
5435
|
/**
|
|
5436
5436
|
* Specify the length, in whole seconds, of each segment. When you don't specify a value, MediaConvert defaults to 10. Related settings: Use Segment length control to specify whether the encoder enforces this value strictly. Use Segment control to specify whether MediaConvert creates separate segment files or one content file that has metadata to mark the segment boundaries.
|
|
5437
5437
|
* @public
|
|
5438
5438
|
*/
|
|
5439
|
-
SegmentLength?: number;
|
|
5439
|
+
SegmentLength?: number | undefined;
|
|
5440
5440
|
/**
|
|
5441
5441
|
* Specify how you want MediaConvert to determine the segment length. Choose Exact to have the encoder use the exact length that you specify with the setting Segment length. This might result in extra I-frames. Choose Multiple of GOP to have the encoder round up the segment lengths to match the next GOP boundary.
|
|
5442
5442
|
* @public
|
|
5443
5443
|
*/
|
|
5444
|
-
SegmentLengthControl?: CmafSegmentLengthControl;
|
|
5444
|
+
SegmentLengthControl?: CmafSegmentLengthControl | undefined;
|
|
5445
5445
|
/**
|
|
5446
5446
|
* Include or exclude RESOLUTION attribute for video in EXT-X-STREAM-INF tag of variant manifest.
|
|
5447
5447
|
* @public
|
|
5448
5448
|
*/
|
|
5449
|
-
StreamInfResolution?: CmafStreamInfResolution;
|
|
5449
|
+
StreamInfResolution?: CmafStreamInfResolution | undefined;
|
|
5450
5450
|
/**
|
|
5451
5451
|
* When set to LEGACY, the segment target duration is always rounded up to the nearest integer value above its current value in seconds. When set to SPEC\\_COMPLIANT, the segment target duration is rounded up to the nearest integer value if fraction seconds are greater than or equal to 0.5 (>= 0.5) and rounded down if less than 0.5 (< 0.5). You may need to use LEGACY if your client needs to ensure that the target duration is always longer than the actual duration of the segment. Some older players may experience interrupted playback when the actual duration of a track in a segment is longer than the target duration.
|
|
5452
5452
|
* @public
|
|
5453
5453
|
*/
|
|
5454
|
-
TargetDurationCompatibilityMode?: CmafTargetDurationCompatibilityMode;
|
|
5454
|
+
TargetDurationCompatibilityMode?: CmafTargetDurationCompatibilityMode | undefined;
|
|
5455
5455
|
/**
|
|
5456
5456
|
* Specify the video sample composition time offset mode in the output fMP4 TRUN box. For wider player compatibility, set Video composition offsets to Unsigned or leave blank. The earliest presentation time may be greater than zero, and sample composition time offsets will increment using unsigned integers. For strict fMP4 video and audio timing, set Video composition offsets to Signed. The earliest presentation time will be equal to zero, and sample composition time offsets will increment using signed integers.
|
|
5457
5457
|
* @public
|
|
5458
5458
|
*/
|
|
5459
|
-
VideoCompositionOffsets?: CmafVideoCompositionOffsets;
|
|
5459
|
+
VideoCompositionOffsets?: CmafVideoCompositionOffsets | undefined;
|
|
5460
5460
|
/**
|
|
5461
5461
|
* When set to ENABLED, a DASH MPD manifest will be generated for this output.
|
|
5462
5462
|
* @public
|
|
5463
5463
|
*/
|
|
5464
|
-
WriteDashManifest?: CmafWriteDASHManifest;
|
|
5464
|
+
WriteDashManifest?: CmafWriteDASHManifest | undefined;
|
|
5465
5465
|
/**
|
|
5466
5466
|
* When set to ENABLED, an Apple HLS manifest will be generated for this output.
|
|
5467
5467
|
* @public
|
|
5468
5468
|
*/
|
|
5469
|
-
WriteHlsManifest?: CmafWriteHLSManifest;
|
|
5469
|
+
WriteHlsManifest?: CmafWriteHLSManifest | undefined;
|
|
5470
5470
|
/**
|
|
5471
5471
|
* When you enable Precise segment duration in DASH manifests, your DASH manifest shows precise segment durations. The segment duration information appears inside the SegmentTimeline element, inside SegmentTemplate at the Representation level. When this feature isn't enabled, the segment durations in your DASH manifest are approximate. The segment duration information appears in the duration attribute of the SegmentTemplate element.
|
|
5472
5472
|
* @public
|
|
5473
5473
|
*/
|
|
5474
|
-
WriteSegmentTimelineInRepresentation?: CmafWriteSegmentTimelineInRepresentation;
|
|
5474
|
+
WriteSegmentTimelineInRepresentation?: CmafWriteSegmentTimelineInRepresentation | undefined;
|
|
5475
5475
|
}
|
|
5476
5476
|
/**
|
|
5477
5477
|
* @public
|
|
@@ -5506,28 +5506,28 @@ export interface SpekeKeyProvider {
|
|
|
5506
5506
|
* If you want your key provider to encrypt the content keys that it provides to MediaConvert, set up a certificate with a master key using AWS Certificate Manager. Specify the certificate's Amazon Resource Name (ARN) here.
|
|
5507
5507
|
* @public
|
|
5508
5508
|
*/
|
|
5509
|
-
CertificateArn?: string;
|
|
5509
|
+
CertificateArn?: string | undefined;
|
|
5510
5510
|
/**
|
|
5511
5511
|
* Specify the SPEKE version, either v1.0 or v2.0, that MediaConvert uses when encrypting your output. For more information, see: https://docs.aws.amazon.com/speke/latest/documentation/speke-api-specification.html To use SPEKE v1.0: Leave blank. To use SPEKE v2.0: Specify a SPEKE v2.0 video preset and a SPEKE v2.0 audio preset.
|
|
5512
5512
|
* @public
|
|
5513
5513
|
*/
|
|
5514
|
-
EncryptionContractConfiguration?: EncryptionContractConfiguration;
|
|
5514
|
+
EncryptionContractConfiguration?: EncryptionContractConfiguration | undefined;
|
|
5515
5515
|
/**
|
|
5516
5516
|
* Specify the resource ID that your SPEKE-compliant key provider uses to identify this content.
|
|
5517
5517
|
* @public
|
|
5518
5518
|
*/
|
|
5519
|
-
ResourceId?: string;
|
|
5519
|
+
ResourceId?: string | undefined;
|
|
5520
5520
|
/**
|
|
5521
5521
|
* Relates to SPEKE implementation. DRM system identifiers. DASH output groups support a max of two system ids. Other group types support one system id. See
|
|
5522
5522
|
* https://dashif.org/identifiers/content_protection/ for more details.
|
|
5523
5523
|
* @public
|
|
5524
5524
|
*/
|
|
5525
|
-
SystemIds?: string[];
|
|
5525
|
+
SystemIds?: string[] | undefined;
|
|
5526
5526
|
/**
|
|
5527
5527
|
* Specify the URL to the key server that your SPEKE-compliant DRM key provider uses to provide keys for encrypting your content.
|
|
5528
5528
|
* @public
|
|
5529
5529
|
*/
|
|
5530
|
-
Url?: string;
|
|
5530
|
+
Url?: string | undefined;
|
|
5531
5531
|
}
|
|
5532
5532
|
/**
|
|
5533
5533
|
* Specifies DRM settings for DASH outputs.
|
|
@@ -5538,12 +5538,12 @@ export interface DashIsoEncryptionSettings {
|
|
|
5538
5538
|
* This setting can improve the compatibility of your output with video players on obsolete devices. It applies only to DASH H.264 outputs with DRM encryption. Choose Unencrypted SEI only to correct problems with playback on older devices. Otherwise, keep the default setting CENC v1. If you choose Unencrypted SEI, for that output, the service will exclude the access unit delimiter and will leave the SEI NAL units unencrypted.
|
|
5539
5539
|
* @public
|
|
5540
5540
|
*/
|
|
5541
|
-
PlaybackDeviceCompatibility?: DashIsoPlaybackDeviceCompatibility;
|
|
5541
|
+
PlaybackDeviceCompatibility?: DashIsoPlaybackDeviceCompatibility | undefined;
|
|
5542
5542
|
/**
|
|
5543
5543
|
* If your output group type is HLS, DASH, or Microsoft Smooth, use these settings when doing DRM encryption with a SPEKE-compliant key provider. If your output group type is CMAF, use the SpekeKeyProviderCmaf settings instead.
|
|
5544
5544
|
* @public
|
|
5545
5545
|
*/
|
|
5546
|
-
SpekeKeyProvider?: SpekeKeyProvider;
|
|
5546
|
+
SpekeKeyProvider?: SpekeKeyProvider | undefined;
|
|
5547
5547
|
}
|
|
5548
5548
|
/**
|
|
5549
5549
|
* @public
|
|
@@ -5592,32 +5592,32 @@ export interface DashIsoImageBasedTrickPlaySettings {
|
|
|
5592
5592
|
* The cadence MediaConvert follows for generating thumbnails. If set to FOLLOW_IFRAME, MediaConvert generates thumbnails for each IDR frame in the output (matching the GOP cadence). If set to FOLLOW_CUSTOM, MediaConvert generates thumbnails according to the interval you specify in thumbnailInterval.
|
|
5593
5593
|
* @public
|
|
5594
5594
|
*/
|
|
5595
|
-
IntervalCadence?: DashIsoIntervalCadence;
|
|
5595
|
+
IntervalCadence?: DashIsoIntervalCadence | undefined;
|
|
5596
5596
|
/**
|
|
5597
5597
|
* Height of each thumbnail within each tile image, in pixels. Leave blank to maintain aspect ratio with thumbnail width. If following the aspect ratio would lead to a total tile height greater than 4096, then the job will be rejected. Must be divisible by 2.
|
|
5598
5598
|
* @public
|
|
5599
5599
|
*/
|
|
5600
|
-
ThumbnailHeight?: number;
|
|
5600
|
+
ThumbnailHeight?: number | undefined;
|
|
5601
5601
|
/**
|
|
5602
5602
|
* Enter the interval, in seconds, that MediaConvert uses to generate thumbnails. If the interval you enter doesn't align with the output frame rate, MediaConvert automatically rounds the interval to align with the output frame rate. For example, if the output frame rate is 29.97 frames per second and you enter 5, MediaConvert uses a 150 frame interval to generate thumbnails.
|
|
5603
5603
|
* @public
|
|
5604
5604
|
*/
|
|
5605
|
-
ThumbnailInterval?: number;
|
|
5605
|
+
ThumbnailInterval?: number | undefined;
|
|
5606
5606
|
/**
|
|
5607
5607
|
* Width of each thumbnail within each tile image, in pixels. Default is 312. Must be divisible by 8.
|
|
5608
5608
|
* @public
|
|
5609
5609
|
*/
|
|
5610
|
-
ThumbnailWidth?: number;
|
|
5610
|
+
ThumbnailWidth?: number | undefined;
|
|
5611
5611
|
/**
|
|
5612
5612
|
* Number of thumbnails in each column of a tile image. Set a value between 2 and 2048. Must be divisible by 2.
|
|
5613
5613
|
* @public
|
|
5614
5614
|
*/
|
|
5615
|
-
TileHeight?: number;
|
|
5615
|
+
TileHeight?: number | undefined;
|
|
5616
5616
|
/**
|
|
5617
5617
|
* Number of thumbnails in each row of a tile image. Set a value between 1 and 512.
|
|
5618
5618
|
* @public
|
|
5619
5619
|
*/
|
|
5620
|
-
TileWidth?: number;
|
|
5620
|
+
TileWidth?: number | undefined;
|
|
5621
5621
|
}
|
|
5622
5622
|
/**
|
|
5623
5623
|
* @public
|
|
@@ -5712,112 +5712,112 @@ export interface DashIsoGroupSettings {
|
|
|
5712
5712
|
* By default, the service creates one .mpd DASH manifest for each DASH ISO output group in your job. This default manifest references every output in the output group. To create additional DASH manifests that reference a subset of the outputs in the output group, specify a list of them here.
|
|
5713
5713
|
* @public
|
|
5714
5714
|
*/
|
|
5715
|
-
AdditionalManifests?: DashAdditionalManifest[];
|
|
5715
|
+
AdditionalManifests?: DashAdditionalManifest[] | undefined;
|
|
5716
5716
|
/**
|
|
5717
5717
|
* Use this setting only when your audio codec is a Dolby one (AC3, EAC3, or Atmos) and your downstream workflow requires that your DASH manifest use the Dolby channel configuration tag, rather than the MPEG one. For example, you might need to use this to make dynamic ad insertion work. Specify which audio channel configuration scheme ID URI MediaConvert writes in your DASH manifest. Keep the default value, MPEG channel configuration, to have MediaConvert write this: urn:mpeg:mpegB:cicp:ChannelConfiguration. Choose Dolby channel configuration to have MediaConvert write this instead: tag:dolby.com,2014:dash:audio_channel_configuration:2011.
|
|
5718
5718
|
* @public
|
|
5719
5719
|
*/
|
|
5720
|
-
AudioChannelConfigSchemeIdUri?: DashIsoGroupAudioChannelConfigSchemeIdUri;
|
|
5720
|
+
AudioChannelConfigSchemeIdUri?: DashIsoGroupAudioChannelConfigSchemeIdUri | undefined;
|
|
5721
5721
|
/**
|
|
5722
5722
|
* A partial URI prefix that will be put in the manifest (.mpd) file at the top level BaseURL element. Can be used if streams are delivered from a different URL than the manifest file.
|
|
5723
5723
|
* @public
|
|
5724
5724
|
*/
|
|
5725
|
-
BaseUrl?: string;
|
|
5725
|
+
BaseUrl?: string | undefined;
|
|
5726
5726
|
/**
|
|
5727
5727
|
* Specify whether MediaConvert generates I-frame only video segments for DASH trick play, also known as trick mode. When specified, the I-frame only video segments are included within an additional AdaptationSet in your DASH output manifest. To generate I-frame only video segments: Enter a name as a text string, up to 256 character long. This name is appended to the end of this output group's base filename, that you specify as part of your destination URI, and used for the I-frame only video segment files. You may also include format identifiers. For more information, see: https://docs.aws.amazon.com/mediaconvert/latest/ug/using-variables-in-your-job-settings.html#using-settings-variables-with-streaming-outputs To not generate I-frame only video segments: Leave blank.
|
|
5728
5728
|
* @public
|
|
5729
5729
|
*/
|
|
5730
|
-
DashIFrameTrickPlayNameModifier?: string;
|
|
5730
|
+
DashIFrameTrickPlayNameModifier?: string | undefined;
|
|
5731
5731
|
/**
|
|
5732
5732
|
* Specify how MediaConvert writes SegmentTimeline in your output DASH manifest. To write a SegmentTimeline in each video Representation: Keep the default value, Basic. To write a common SegmentTimeline in the video AdaptationSet: Choose Compact. Note that MediaConvert will still write a SegmentTimeline in any Representation that does not share a common timeline. To write a video AdaptationSet for each different output framerate, and a common SegmentTimeline in each AdaptationSet: Choose Distinct.
|
|
5733
5733
|
* @public
|
|
5734
5734
|
*/
|
|
5735
|
-
DashManifestStyle?: DashManifestStyle;
|
|
5735
|
+
DashManifestStyle?: DashManifestStyle | undefined;
|
|
5736
5736
|
/**
|
|
5737
5737
|
* Use Destination to specify the S3 output location and the output filename base. Destination accepts format identifiers. If you do not specify the base filename in the URI, the service will use the filename of the input file. If your job has multiple inputs, the service uses the filename of the first input file.
|
|
5738
5738
|
* @public
|
|
5739
5739
|
*/
|
|
5740
|
-
Destination?: string;
|
|
5740
|
+
Destination?: string | undefined;
|
|
5741
5741
|
/**
|
|
5742
5742
|
* Settings associated with the destination. Will vary based on the type of destination
|
|
5743
5743
|
* @public
|
|
5744
5744
|
*/
|
|
5745
|
-
DestinationSettings?: DestinationSettings;
|
|
5745
|
+
DestinationSettings?: DestinationSettings | undefined;
|
|
5746
5746
|
/**
|
|
5747
5747
|
* DRM settings.
|
|
5748
5748
|
* @public
|
|
5749
5749
|
*/
|
|
5750
|
-
Encryption?: DashIsoEncryptionSettings;
|
|
5750
|
+
Encryption?: DashIsoEncryptionSettings | undefined;
|
|
5751
5751
|
/**
|
|
5752
5752
|
* Length of fragments to generate (in seconds). Fragment length must be compatible with GOP size and Framerate. Note that fragments will end on the next keyframe after this number of seconds, so actual fragment length may be longer. When Emit Single File is checked, the fragmentation is internal to a single output file and it does not cause the creation of many output files as in other output types.
|
|
5753
5753
|
* @public
|
|
5754
5754
|
*/
|
|
5755
|
-
FragmentLength?: number;
|
|
5755
|
+
FragmentLength?: number | undefined;
|
|
5756
5756
|
/**
|
|
5757
5757
|
* Supports HbbTV specification as indicated
|
|
5758
5758
|
* @public
|
|
5759
5759
|
*/
|
|
5760
|
-
HbbtvCompliance?: DashIsoHbbtvCompliance;
|
|
5760
|
+
HbbtvCompliance?: DashIsoHbbtvCompliance | undefined;
|
|
5761
5761
|
/**
|
|
5762
5762
|
* Specify whether MediaConvert generates images for trick play. Keep the default value, None, to not generate any images. Choose Thumbnail to generate tiled thumbnails. Choose Thumbnail and full frame to generate tiled thumbnails and full-resolution images of single frames. MediaConvert adds an entry in the .mpd manifest for each set of images that you generate. A common application for these images is Roku trick mode. The thumbnails and full-frame images that MediaConvert creates with this feature are compatible with this Roku specification: https://developer.roku.com/docs/developer-program/media-playback/trick-mode/hls-and-dash.md
|
|
5763
5763
|
* @public
|
|
5764
5764
|
*/
|
|
5765
|
-
ImageBasedTrickPlay?: DashIsoImageBasedTrickPlay;
|
|
5765
|
+
ImageBasedTrickPlay?: DashIsoImageBasedTrickPlay | undefined;
|
|
5766
5766
|
/**
|
|
5767
5767
|
* Tile and thumbnail settings applicable when imageBasedTrickPlay is ADVANCED
|
|
5768
5768
|
* @public
|
|
5769
5769
|
*/
|
|
5770
|
-
ImageBasedTrickPlaySettings?: DashIsoImageBasedTrickPlaySettings;
|
|
5770
|
+
ImageBasedTrickPlaySettings?: DashIsoImageBasedTrickPlaySettings | undefined;
|
|
5771
5771
|
/**
|
|
5772
5772
|
* Minimum time of initially buffered media that is needed to ensure smooth playout.
|
|
5773
5773
|
* @public
|
|
5774
5774
|
*/
|
|
5775
|
-
MinBufferTime?: number;
|
|
5775
|
+
MinBufferTime?: number | undefined;
|
|
5776
5776
|
/**
|
|
5777
5777
|
* Keep this setting at the default value of 0, unless you are troubleshooting a problem with how devices play back the end of your video asset. If you know that player devices are hanging on the final segment of your video because the length of your final segment is too short, use this setting to specify a minimum final segment length, in seconds. Choose a value that is greater than or equal to 1 and less than your segment length. When you specify a value for this setting, the encoder will combine any final segment that is shorter than the length that you specify with the previous segment. For example, your segment length is 3 seconds and your final segment is .5 seconds without a minimum final segment length; when you set the minimum final segment length to 1, your final segment is 3.5 seconds.
|
|
5778
5778
|
* @public
|
|
5779
5779
|
*/
|
|
5780
|
-
MinFinalSegmentLength?: number;
|
|
5780
|
+
MinFinalSegmentLength?: number | undefined;
|
|
5781
5781
|
/**
|
|
5782
5782
|
* Specify how the value for bandwidth is determined for each video Representation in your output MPD manifest. We recommend that you choose a MPD manifest bandwidth type that is compatible with your downstream player configuration. Max: Use the same value that you specify for Max bitrate in the video output, in bits per second. Average: Use the calculated average bitrate of the encoded video output, in bits per second.
|
|
5783
5783
|
* @public
|
|
5784
5784
|
*/
|
|
5785
|
-
MpdManifestBandwidthType?: DashIsoMpdManifestBandwidthType;
|
|
5785
|
+
MpdManifestBandwidthType?: DashIsoMpdManifestBandwidthType | undefined;
|
|
5786
5786
|
/**
|
|
5787
5787
|
* Specify whether your DASH profile is on-demand or main. When you choose Main profile, the service signals urn:mpeg:dash:profile:isoff-main:2011 in your .mpd DASH manifest. When you choose On-demand, the service signals urn:mpeg:dash:profile:isoff-on-demand:2011 in your .mpd. When you choose On-demand, you must also set the output group setting Segment control to Single file.
|
|
5788
5788
|
* @public
|
|
5789
5789
|
*/
|
|
5790
|
-
MpdProfile?: DashIsoMpdProfile;
|
|
5790
|
+
MpdProfile?: DashIsoMpdProfile | undefined;
|
|
5791
5791
|
/**
|
|
5792
5792
|
* Use this setting only when your output video stream has B-frames, which causes the initial presentation time stamp (PTS) to be offset from the initial decode time stamp (DTS). Specify how MediaConvert handles PTS when writing time stamps in output DASH manifests. Choose Match initial PTS when you want MediaConvert to use the initial PTS as the first time stamp in the manifest. Choose Zero-based to have MediaConvert ignore the initial PTS in the video stream and instead write the initial time stamp as zero in the manifest. For outputs that don't have B-frames, the time stamps in your DASH manifests start at zero regardless of your choice here.
|
|
5793
5793
|
* @public
|
|
5794
5794
|
*/
|
|
5795
|
-
PtsOffsetHandlingForBFrames?: DashIsoPtsOffsetHandlingForBFrames;
|
|
5795
|
+
PtsOffsetHandlingForBFrames?: DashIsoPtsOffsetHandlingForBFrames | undefined;
|
|
5796
5796
|
/**
|
|
5797
5797
|
* When set to SINGLE_FILE, a single output file is generated, which is internally segmented using the Fragment Length and Segment Length. When set to SEGMENTED_FILES, separate segment files will be created.
|
|
5798
5798
|
* @public
|
|
5799
5799
|
*/
|
|
5800
|
-
SegmentControl?: DashIsoSegmentControl;
|
|
5800
|
+
SegmentControl?: DashIsoSegmentControl | undefined;
|
|
5801
5801
|
/**
|
|
5802
5802
|
* Specify the length, in whole seconds, of each segment. When you don't specify a value, MediaConvert defaults to 30. Related settings: Use Segment length control to specify whether the encoder enforces this value strictly. Use Segment control to specify whether MediaConvert creates separate segment files or one content file that has metadata to mark the segment boundaries.
|
|
5803
5803
|
* @public
|
|
5804
5804
|
*/
|
|
5805
|
-
SegmentLength?: number;
|
|
5805
|
+
SegmentLength?: number | undefined;
|
|
5806
5806
|
/**
|
|
5807
5807
|
* Specify how you want MediaConvert to determine the segment length. Choose Exact to have the encoder use the exact length that you specify with the setting Segment length. This might result in extra I-frames. Choose Multiple of GOP to have the encoder round up the segment lengths to match the next GOP boundary.
|
|
5808
5808
|
* @public
|
|
5809
5809
|
*/
|
|
5810
|
-
SegmentLengthControl?: DashIsoSegmentLengthControl;
|
|
5810
|
+
SegmentLengthControl?: DashIsoSegmentLengthControl | undefined;
|
|
5811
5811
|
/**
|
|
5812
5812
|
* Specify the video sample composition time offset mode in the output fMP4 TRUN box. For wider player compatibility, set Video composition offsets to Unsigned or leave blank. The earliest presentation time may be greater than zero, and sample composition time offsets will increment using unsigned integers. For strict fMP4 video and audio timing, set Video composition offsets to Signed. The earliest presentation time will be equal to zero, and sample composition time offsets will increment using signed integers.
|
|
5813
5813
|
* @public
|
|
5814
5814
|
*/
|
|
5815
|
-
VideoCompositionOffsets?: DashIsoVideoCompositionOffsets;
|
|
5815
|
+
VideoCompositionOffsets?: DashIsoVideoCompositionOffsets | undefined;
|
|
5816
5816
|
/**
|
|
5817
5817
|
* If you get an HTTP error in the 400 range when you play back your DASH output, enable this setting and run your transcoding job again. When you enable this setting, the service writes precise segment durations in the DASH manifest. The segment duration information appears inside the SegmentTimeline element, inside SegmentTemplate at the Representation level. When you don't enable this setting, the service writes approximate segment durations in your DASH manifest.
|
|
5818
5818
|
* @public
|
|
5819
5819
|
*/
|
|
5820
|
-
WriteSegmentTimelineInRepresentation?: DashIsoWriteSegmentTimelineInRepresentation;
|
|
5820
|
+
WriteSegmentTimelineInRepresentation?: DashIsoWriteSegmentTimelineInRepresentation | undefined;
|
|
5821
5821
|
}
|
|
5822
5822
|
/**
|
|
5823
5823
|
* Settings related to your File output group. MediaConvert uses this group of settings to generate a single standalone file, rather than a streaming package.
|
|
@@ -5828,12 +5828,12 @@ export interface FileGroupSettings {
|
|
|
5828
5828
|
* Use Destination to specify the S3 output location and the output filename base. Destination accepts format identifiers. If you do not specify the base filename in the URI, the service will use the filename of the input file. If your job has multiple inputs, the service uses the filename of the first input file.
|
|
5829
5829
|
* @public
|
|
5830
5830
|
*/
|
|
5831
|
-
Destination?: string;
|
|
5831
|
+
Destination?: string | undefined;
|
|
5832
5832
|
/**
|
|
5833
5833
|
* Settings associated with the destination. Will vary based on the type of destination
|
|
5834
5834
|
* @public
|
|
5835
5835
|
*/
|
|
5836
|
-
DestinationSettings?: DestinationSettings;
|
|
5836
|
+
DestinationSettings?: DestinationSettings | undefined;
|
|
5837
5837
|
}
|
|
5838
5838
|
/**
|
|
5839
5839
|
* @public
|
|
@@ -5965,37 +5965,37 @@ export interface HlsEncryptionSettings {
|
|
|
5965
5965
|
* This is a 128-bit, 16-byte hex value represented by a 32-character text string. If this parameter is not set then the Initialization Vector will follow the segment number by default.
|
|
5966
5966
|
* @public
|
|
5967
5967
|
*/
|
|
5968
|
-
ConstantInitializationVector?: string;
|
|
5968
|
+
ConstantInitializationVector?: string | undefined;
|
|
5969
5969
|
/**
|
|
5970
5970
|
* Encrypts the segments with the given encryption scheme. Leave blank to disable. Selecting 'Disabled' in the web interface also disables encryption.
|
|
5971
5971
|
* @public
|
|
5972
5972
|
*/
|
|
5973
|
-
EncryptionMethod?: HlsEncryptionType;
|
|
5973
|
+
EncryptionMethod?: HlsEncryptionType | undefined;
|
|
5974
5974
|
/**
|
|
5975
5975
|
* The Initialization Vector is a 128-bit number used in conjunction with the key for encrypting blocks. If set to INCLUDE, Initialization Vector is listed in the manifest. Otherwise Initialization Vector is not in the manifest.
|
|
5976
5976
|
* @public
|
|
5977
5977
|
*/
|
|
5978
|
-
InitializationVectorInManifest?: HlsInitializationVectorInManifest;
|
|
5978
|
+
InitializationVectorInManifest?: HlsInitializationVectorInManifest | undefined;
|
|
5979
5979
|
/**
|
|
5980
5980
|
* Enable this setting to insert the EXT-X-SESSION-KEY element into the master playlist. This allows for offline Apple HLS FairPlay content protection.
|
|
5981
5981
|
* @public
|
|
5982
5982
|
*/
|
|
5983
|
-
OfflineEncrypted?: HlsOfflineEncrypted;
|
|
5983
|
+
OfflineEncrypted?: HlsOfflineEncrypted | undefined;
|
|
5984
5984
|
/**
|
|
5985
5985
|
* If your output group type is HLS, DASH, or Microsoft Smooth, use these settings when doing DRM encryption with a SPEKE-compliant key provider. If your output group type is CMAF, use the SpekeKeyProviderCmaf settings instead.
|
|
5986
5986
|
* @public
|
|
5987
5987
|
*/
|
|
5988
|
-
SpekeKeyProvider?: SpekeKeyProvider;
|
|
5988
|
+
SpekeKeyProvider?: SpekeKeyProvider | undefined;
|
|
5989
5989
|
/**
|
|
5990
5990
|
* Use these settings to set up encryption with a static key provider.
|
|
5991
5991
|
* @public
|
|
5992
5992
|
*/
|
|
5993
|
-
StaticKeyProvider?: StaticKeyProvider;
|
|
5993
|
+
StaticKeyProvider?: StaticKeyProvider | undefined;
|
|
5994
5994
|
/**
|
|
5995
5995
|
* Specify whether your DRM encryption key is static or from a key provider that follows the SPEKE standard. For more information about SPEKE, see https://docs.aws.amazon.com/speke/latest/documentation/what-is-speke.html.
|
|
5996
5996
|
* @public
|
|
5997
5997
|
*/
|
|
5998
|
-
Type?: HlsKeyProviderType;
|
|
5998
|
+
Type?: HlsKeyProviderType | undefined;
|
|
5999
5999
|
}
|
|
6000
6000
|
/**
|
|
6001
6001
|
* @public
|
|
@@ -6032,32 +6032,32 @@ export interface HlsImageBasedTrickPlaySettings {
|
|
|
6032
6032
|
* The cadence MediaConvert follows for generating thumbnails. If set to FOLLOW_IFRAME, MediaConvert generates thumbnails for each IDR frame in the output (matching the GOP cadence). If set to FOLLOW_CUSTOM, MediaConvert generates thumbnails according to the interval you specify in thumbnailInterval.
|
|
6033
6033
|
* @public
|
|
6034
6034
|
*/
|
|
6035
|
-
IntervalCadence?: HlsIntervalCadence;
|
|
6035
|
+
IntervalCadence?: HlsIntervalCadence | undefined;
|
|
6036
6036
|
/**
|
|
6037
6037
|
* Height of each thumbnail within each tile image, in pixels. Leave blank to maintain aspect ratio with thumbnail width. If following the aspect ratio would lead to a total tile height greater than 4096, then the job will be rejected. Must be divisible by 2.
|
|
6038
6038
|
* @public
|
|
6039
6039
|
*/
|
|
6040
|
-
ThumbnailHeight?: number;
|
|
6040
|
+
ThumbnailHeight?: number | undefined;
|
|
6041
6041
|
/**
|
|
6042
6042
|
* Enter the interval, in seconds, that MediaConvert uses to generate thumbnails. If the interval you enter doesn't align with the output frame rate, MediaConvert automatically rounds the interval to align with the output frame rate. For example, if the output frame rate is 29.97 frames per second and you enter 5, MediaConvert uses a 150 frame interval to generate thumbnails.
|
|
6043
6043
|
* @public
|
|
6044
6044
|
*/
|
|
6045
|
-
ThumbnailInterval?: number;
|
|
6045
|
+
ThumbnailInterval?: number | undefined;
|
|
6046
6046
|
/**
|
|
6047
6047
|
* Width of each thumbnail within each tile image, in pixels. Default is 312. Must be divisible by 8.
|
|
6048
6048
|
* @public
|
|
6049
6049
|
*/
|
|
6050
|
-
ThumbnailWidth?: number;
|
|
6050
|
+
ThumbnailWidth?: number | undefined;
|
|
6051
6051
|
/**
|
|
6052
6052
|
* Number of thumbnails in each column of a tile image. Set a value between 2 and 2048. Must be divisible by 2.
|
|
6053
6053
|
* @public
|
|
6054
6054
|
*/
|
|
6055
|
-
TileHeight?: number;
|
|
6055
|
+
TileHeight?: number | undefined;
|
|
6056
6056
|
/**
|
|
6057
6057
|
* Number of thumbnails in each row of a tile image. Set a value between 1 and 512.
|
|
6058
6058
|
* @public
|
|
6059
6059
|
*/
|
|
6060
|
-
TileWidth?: number;
|
|
6060
|
+
TileWidth?: number | undefined;
|
|
6061
6061
|
}
|
|
6062
6062
|
/**
|
|
6063
6063
|
* @public
|
|
@@ -6189,162 +6189,162 @@ export interface HlsGroupSettings {
|
|
|
6189
6189
|
* Choose one or more ad marker types to decorate your Apple HLS manifest. This setting does not determine whether SCTE-35 markers appear in the outputs themselves.
|
|
6190
6190
|
* @public
|
|
6191
6191
|
*/
|
|
6192
|
-
AdMarkers?: HlsAdMarkers[];
|
|
6192
|
+
AdMarkers?: HlsAdMarkers[] | undefined;
|
|
6193
6193
|
/**
|
|
6194
6194
|
* By default, the service creates one top-level .m3u8 HLS manifest for each HLS output group in your job. This default manifest references every output in the output group. To create additional top-level manifests that reference a subset of the outputs in the output group, specify a list of them here.
|
|
6195
6195
|
* @public
|
|
6196
6196
|
*/
|
|
6197
|
-
AdditionalManifests?: HlsAdditionalManifest[];
|
|
6197
|
+
AdditionalManifests?: HlsAdditionalManifest[] | undefined;
|
|
6198
6198
|
/**
|
|
6199
6199
|
* Ignore this setting unless you are using FairPlay DRM with Verimatrix and you encounter playback issues. Keep the default value, Include, to output audio-only headers. Choose Exclude to remove the audio-only headers from your audio segments.
|
|
6200
6200
|
* @public
|
|
6201
6201
|
*/
|
|
6202
|
-
AudioOnlyHeader?: HlsAudioOnlyHeader;
|
|
6202
|
+
AudioOnlyHeader?: HlsAudioOnlyHeader | undefined;
|
|
6203
6203
|
/**
|
|
6204
6204
|
* A partial URI prefix that will be prepended to each output in the media .m3u8 file. Can be used if base manifest is delivered from a different URL than the main .m3u8 file.
|
|
6205
6205
|
* @public
|
|
6206
6206
|
*/
|
|
6207
|
-
BaseUrl?: string;
|
|
6207
|
+
BaseUrl?: string | undefined;
|
|
6208
6208
|
/**
|
|
6209
6209
|
* Language to be used on Caption outputs
|
|
6210
6210
|
* @public
|
|
6211
6211
|
*/
|
|
6212
|
-
CaptionLanguageMappings?: HlsCaptionLanguageMapping[];
|
|
6212
|
+
CaptionLanguageMappings?: HlsCaptionLanguageMapping[] | undefined;
|
|
6213
6213
|
/**
|
|
6214
6214
|
* Applies only to 608 Embedded output captions. Insert: Include CLOSED-CAPTIONS lines in the manifest. Specify at least one language in the CC1 Language Code field. One CLOSED-CAPTION line is added for each Language Code you specify. Make sure to specify the languages in the order in which they appear in the original source (if the source is embedded format) or the order of the caption selectors (if the source is other than embedded). Otherwise, languages in the manifest will not match up properly with the output captions. None: Include CLOSED-CAPTIONS=NONE line in the manifest. Omit: Omit any CLOSED-CAPTIONS line from the manifest.
|
|
6215
6215
|
* @public
|
|
6216
6216
|
*/
|
|
6217
|
-
CaptionLanguageSetting?: HlsCaptionLanguageSetting;
|
|
6217
|
+
CaptionLanguageSetting?: HlsCaptionLanguageSetting | undefined;
|
|
6218
6218
|
/**
|
|
6219
6219
|
* Set Caption segment length control to Match video to create caption segments that align with the video segments from the first video output in this output group. For example, if the video segments are 2 seconds long, your WebVTT segments will also be 2 seconds long. Keep the default setting, Large segments to create caption segments that are 300 seconds long.
|
|
6220
6220
|
* @public
|
|
6221
6221
|
*/
|
|
6222
|
-
CaptionSegmentLengthControl?: HlsCaptionSegmentLengthControl;
|
|
6222
|
+
CaptionSegmentLengthControl?: HlsCaptionSegmentLengthControl | undefined;
|
|
6223
6223
|
/**
|
|
6224
6224
|
* Disable this setting only when your workflow requires the #EXT-X-ALLOW-CACHE:no tag. Otherwise, keep the default value Enabled and control caching in your video distribution set up. For example, use the Cache-Control http header.
|
|
6225
6225
|
* @public
|
|
6226
6226
|
*/
|
|
6227
|
-
ClientCache?: HlsClientCache;
|
|
6227
|
+
ClientCache?: HlsClientCache | undefined;
|
|
6228
6228
|
/**
|
|
6229
6229
|
* Specification to use (RFC-6381 or the default RFC-4281) during m3u8 playlist generation.
|
|
6230
6230
|
* @public
|
|
6231
6231
|
*/
|
|
6232
|
-
CodecSpecification?: HlsCodecSpecification;
|
|
6232
|
+
CodecSpecification?: HlsCodecSpecification | undefined;
|
|
6233
6233
|
/**
|
|
6234
6234
|
* Use Destination to specify the S3 output location and the output filename base. Destination accepts format identifiers. If you do not specify the base filename in the URI, the service will use the filename of the input file. If your job has multiple inputs, the service uses the filename of the first input file.
|
|
6235
6235
|
* @public
|
|
6236
6236
|
*/
|
|
6237
|
-
Destination?: string;
|
|
6237
|
+
Destination?: string | undefined;
|
|
6238
6238
|
/**
|
|
6239
6239
|
* Settings associated with the destination. Will vary based on the type of destination
|
|
6240
6240
|
* @public
|
|
6241
6241
|
*/
|
|
6242
|
-
DestinationSettings?: DestinationSettings;
|
|
6242
|
+
DestinationSettings?: DestinationSettings | undefined;
|
|
6243
6243
|
/**
|
|
6244
6244
|
* Indicates whether segments should be placed in subdirectories.
|
|
6245
6245
|
* @public
|
|
6246
6246
|
*/
|
|
6247
|
-
DirectoryStructure?: HlsDirectoryStructure;
|
|
6247
|
+
DirectoryStructure?: HlsDirectoryStructure | undefined;
|
|
6248
6248
|
/**
|
|
6249
6249
|
* DRM settings.
|
|
6250
6250
|
* @public
|
|
6251
6251
|
*/
|
|
6252
|
-
Encryption?: HlsEncryptionSettings;
|
|
6252
|
+
Encryption?: HlsEncryptionSettings | undefined;
|
|
6253
6253
|
/**
|
|
6254
6254
|
* Specify whether MediaConvert generates images for trick play. Keep the default value, None, to not generate any images. Choose Thumbnail to generate tiled thumbnails. Choose Thumbnail and full frame to generate tiled thumbnails and full-resolution images of single frames. MediaConvert creates a child manifest for each set of images that you generate and adds corresponding entries to the parent manifest. A common application for these images is Roku trick mode. The thumbnails and full-frame images that MediaConvert creates with this feature are compatible with this Roku specification: https://developer.roku.com/docs/developer-program/media-playback/trick-mode/hls-and-dash.md
|
|
6255
6255
|
* @public
|
|
6256
6256
|
*/
|
|
6257
|
-
ImageBasedTrickPlay?: HlsImageBasedTrickPlay;
|
|
6257
|
+
ImageBasedTrickPlay?: HlsImageBasedTrickPlay | undefined;
|
|
6258
6258
|
/**
|
|
6259
6259
|
* Tile and thumbnail settings applicable when imageBasedTrickPlay is ADVANCED
|
|
6260
6260
|
* @public
|
|
6261
6261
|
*/
|
|
6262
|
-
ImageBasedTrickPlaySettings?: HlsImageBasedTrickPlaySettings;
|
|
6262
|
+
ImageBasedTrickPlaySettings?: HlsImageBasedTrickPlaySettings | undefined;
|
|
6263
6263
|
/**
|
|
6264
6264
|
* When set to GZIP, compresses HLS playlist.
|
|
6265
6265
|
* @public
|
|
6266
6266
|
*/
|
|
6267
|
-
ManifestCompression?: HlsManifestCompression;
|
|
6267
|
+
ManifestCompression?: HlsManifestCompression | undefined;
|
|
6268
6268
|
/**
|
|
6269
6269
|
* Indicates whether the output manifest should use floating point values for segment duration.
|
|
6270
6270
|
* @public
|
|
6271
6271
|
*/
|
|
6272
|
-
ManifestDurationFormat?: HlsManifestDurationFormat;
|
|
6272
|
+
ManifestDurationFormat?: HlsManifestDurationFormat | undefined;
|
|
6273
6273
|
/**
|
|
6274
6274
|
* Keep this setting at the default value of 0, unless you are troubleshooting a problem with how devices play back the end of your video asset. If you know that player devices are hanging on the final segment of your video because the length of your final segment is too short, use this setting to specify a minimum final segment length, in seconds. Choose a value that is greater than or equal to 1 and less than your segment length. When you specify a value for this setting, the encoder will combine any final segment that is shorter than the length that you specify with the previous segment. For example, your segment length is 3 seconds and your final segment is .5 seconds without a minimum final segment length; when you set the minimum final segment length to 1, your final segment is 3.5 seconds.
|
|
6275
6275
|
* @public
|
|
6276
6276
|
*/
|
|
6277
|
-
MinFinalSegmentLength?: number;
|
|
6277
|
+
MinFinalSegmentLength?: number | undefined;
|
|
6278
6278
|
/**
|
|
6279
6279
|
* When set, Minimum Segment Size is enforced by looking ahead and back within the specified range for a nearby avail and extending the segment size if needed.
|
|
6280
6280
|
* @public
|
|
6281
6281
|
*/
|
|
6282
|
-
MinSegmentLength?: number;
|
|
6282
|
+
MinSegmentLength?: number | undefined;
|
|
6283
6283
|
/**
|
|
6284
6284
|
* Indicates whether the .m3u8 manifest file should be generated for this HLS output group.
|
|
6285
6285
|
* @public
|
|
6286
6286
|
*/
|
|
6287
|
-
OutputSelection?: HlsOutputSelection;
|
|
6287
|
+
OutputSelection?: HlsOutputSelection | undefined;
|
|
6288
6288
|
/**
|
|
6289
6289
|
* Includes or excludes EXT-X-PROGRAM-DATE-TIME tag in .m3u8 manifest files. The value is calculated as follows: either the program date and time are initialized using the input timecode source, or the time is initialized using the input timecode source and the date is initialized using the timestamp_offset.
|
|
6290
6290
|
* @public
|
|
6291
6291
|
*/
|
|
6292
|
-
ProgramDateTime?: HlsProgramDateTime;
|
|
6292
|
+
ProgramDateTime?: HlsProgramDateTime | undefined;
|
|
6293
6293
|
/**
|
|
6294
6294
|
* Period of insertion of EXT-X-PROGRAM-DATE-TIME entry, in seconds.
|
|
6295
6295
|
* @public
|
|
6296
6296
|
*/
|
|
6297
|
-
ProgramDateTimePeriod?: number;
|
|
6297
|
+
ProgramDateTimePeriod?: number | undefined;
|
|
6298
6298
|
/**
|
|
6299
6299
|
* Specify whether MediaConvert generates HLS manifests while your job is running or when your job is complete. To generate HLS manifests while your job is running: Choose Enabled. Use if you want to play back your content as soon as it's available. MediaConvert writes the parent and child manifests after the first three media segments are written to your destination S3 bucket. It then writes new updated manifests after each additional segment is written. The parent manifest includes the latest BANDWIDTH and AVERAGE-BANDWIDTH attributes, and child manifests include the latest available media segment. When your job completes, the final child playlists include an EXT-X-ENDLIST tag. To generate HLS manifests only when your job completes: Choose Disabled.
|
|
6300
6300
|
* @public
|
|
6301
6301
|
*/
|
|
6302
|
-
ProgressiveWriteHlsManifest?: HlsProgressiveWriteHlsManifest;
|
|
6302
|
+
ProgressiveWriteHlsManifest?: HlsProgressiveWriteHlsManifest | undefined;
|
|
6303
6303
|
/**
|
|
6304
6304
|
* When set to SINGLE_FILE, emits program as a single media resource (.ts) file, uses #EXT-X-BYTERANGE tags to index segment for playback.
|
|
6305
6305
|
* @public
|
|
6306
6306
|
*/
|
|
6307
|
-
SegmentControl?: HlsSegmentControl;
|
|
6307
|
+
SegmentControl?: HlsSegmentControl | undefined;
|
|
6308
6308
|
/**
|
|
6309
6309
|
* Specify the length, in whole seconds, of each segment. When you don't specify a value, MediaConvert defaults to 10. Related settings: Use Segment length control to specify whether the encoder enforces this value strictly. Use Segment control to specify whether MediaConvert creates separate segment files or one content file that has metadata to mark the segment boundaries.
|
|
6310
6310
|
* @public
|
|
6311
6311
|
*/
|
|
6312
|
-
SegmentLength?: number;
|
|
6312
|
+
SegmentLength?: number | undefined;
|
|
6313
6313
|
/**
|
|
6314
6314
|
* Specify how you want MediaConvert to determine the segment length. Choose Exact to have the encoder use the exact length that you specify with the setting Segment length. This might result in extra I-frames. Choose Multiple of GOP to have the encoder round up the segment lengths to match the next GOP boundary.
|
|
6315
6315
|
* @public
|
|
6316
6316
|
*/
|
|
6317
|
-
SegmentLengthControl?: HlsSegmentLengthControl;
|
|
6317
|
+
SegmentLengthControl?: HlsSegmentLengthControl | undefined;
|
|
6318
6318
|
/**
|
|
6319
6319
|
* Specify the number of segments to write to a subdirectory before starting a new one. You must also set Directory structure to Subdirectory per stream for this setting to have an effect.
|
|
6320
6320
|
* @public
|
|
6321
6321
|
*/
|
|
6322
|
-
SegmentsPerSubdirectory?: number;
|
|
6322
|
+
SegmentsPerSubdirectory?: number | undefined;
|
|
6323
6323
|
/**
|
|
6324
6324
|
* Include or exclude RESOLUTION attribute for video in EXT-X-STREAM-INF tag of variant manifest.
|
|
6325
6325
|
* @public
|
|
6326
6326
|
*/
|
|
6327
|
-
StreamInfResolution?: HlsStreamInfResolution;
|
|
6327
|
+
StreamInfResolution?: HlsStreamInfResolution | undefined;
|
|
6328
6328
|
/**
|
|
6329
6329
|
* When set to LEGACY, the segment target duration is always rounded up to the nearest integer value above its current value in seconds. When set to SPEC\\_COMPLIANT, the segment target duration is rounded up to the nearest integer value if fraction seconds are greater than or equal to 0.5 (>= 0.5) and rounded down if less than 0.5 (< 0.5). You may need to use LEGACY if your client needs to ensure that the target duration is always longer than the actual duration of the segment. Some older players may experience interrupted playback when the actual duration of a track in a segment is longer than the target duration.
|
|
6330
6330
|
* @public
|
|
6331
6331
|
*/
|
|
6332
|
-
TargetDurationCompatibilityMode?: HlsTargetDurationCompatibilityMode;
|
|
6332
|
+
TargetDurationCompatibilityMode?: HlsTargetDurationCompatibilityMode | undefined;
|
|
6333
6333
|
/**
|
|
6334
6334
|
* Specify the type of the ID3 frame to use for ID3 timestamps in your output. To include ID3 timestamps: Specify PRIV or TDRL and set ID3 metadata to Passthrough. To exclude ID3 timestamps: Set ID3 timestamp frame type to None.
|
|
6335
6335
|
* @public
|
|
6336
6336
|
*/
|
|
6337
|
-
TimedMetadataId3Frame?: HlsTimedMetadataId3Frame;
|
|
6337
|
+
TimedMetadataId3Frame?: HlsTimedMetadataId3Frame | undefined;
|
|
6338
6338
|
/**
|
|
6339
6339
|
* Specify the interval in seconds to write ID3 timestamps in your output. The first timestamp starts at the output timecode and date, and increases incrementally with each ID3 timestamp. To use the default interval of 10 seconds: Leave blank. To include this metadata in your output: Set ID3 timestamp frame type to PRIV or TDRL, and set ID3 metadata to Passthrough.
|
|
6340
6340
|
* @public
|
|
6341
6341
|
*/
|
|
6342
|
-
TimedMetadataId3Period?: number;
|
|
6342
|
+
TimedMetadataId3Period?: number | undefined;
|
|
6343
6343
|
/**
|
|
6344
6344
|
* Provides an extra millisecond delta offset to fine tune the timestamps.
|
|
6345
6345
|
* @public
|
|
6346
6346
|
*/
|
|
6347
|
-
TimestampDeltaMilliseconds?: number;
|
|
6347
|
+
TimestampDeltaMilliseconds?: number | undefined;
|
|
6348
6348
|
}
|
|
6349
6349
|
/**
|
|
6350
6350
|
* Specify the details for each additional Microsoft Smooth Streaming manifest that you want the service to generate for this output group. Each manifest can reference a different subset of outputs in the group.
|
|
@@ -6355,12 +6355,12 @@ export interface MsSmoothAdditionalManifest {
|
|
|
6355
6355
|
* Specify a name modifier that the service adds to the name of this manifest to make it different from the file names of the other main manifests in the output group. For example, say that the default main manifest for your Microsoft Smooth group is film-name.ismv. If you enter "-no-premium" for this setting, then the file name the service generates for this top-level manifest is film-name-no-premium.ismv.
|
|
6356
6356
|
* @public
|
|
6357
6357
|
*/
|
|
6358
|
-
ManifestNameModifier?: string;
|
|
6358
|
+
ManifestNameModifier?: string | undefined;
|
|
6359
6359
|
/**
|
|
6360
6360
|
* Specify the outputs that you want this additional top-level manifest to reference.
|
|
6361
6361
|
* @public
|
|
6362
6362
|
*/
|
|
6363
|
-
SelectedOutputs?: string[];
|
|
6363
|
+
SelectedOutputs?: string[] | undefined;
|
|
6364
6364
|
}
|
|
6365
6365
|
/**
|
|
6366
6366
|
* @public
|
|
@@ -6383,7 +6383,7 @@ export interface MsSmoothEncryptionSettings {
|
|
|
6383
6383
|
* If your output group type is HLS, DASH, or Microsoft Smooth, use these settings when doing DRM encryption with a SPEKE-compliant key provider. If your output group type is CMAF, use the SpekeKeyProviderCmaf settings instead.
|
|
6384
6384
|
* @public
|
|
6385
6385
|
*/
|
|
6386
|
-
SpekeKeyProvider?: SpekeKeyProvider;
|
|
6386
|
+
SpekeKeyProvider?: SpekeKeyProvider | undefined;
|
|
6387
6387
|
}
|
|
6388
6388
|
/**
|
|
6389
6389
|
* @public
|
|
@@ -6418,42 +6418,42 @@ export interface MsSmoothGroupSettings {
|
|
|
6418
6418
|
* By default, the service creates one .ism Microsoft Smooth Streaming manifest for each Microsoft Smooth Streaming output group in your job. This default manifest references every output in the output group. To create additional manifests that reference a subset of the outputs in the output group, specify a list of them here.
|
|
6419
6419
|
* @public
|
|
6420
6420
|
*/
|
|
6421
|
-
AdditionalManifests?: MsSmoothAdditionalManifest[];
|
|
6421
|
+
AdditionalManifests?: MsSmoothAdditionalManifest[] | undefined;
|
|
6422
6422
|
/**
|
|
6423
6423
|
* COMBINE_DUPLICATE_STREAMS combines identical audio encoding settings across a Microsoft Smooth output group into a single audio stream.
|
|
6424
6424
|
* @public
|
|
6425
6425
|
*/
|
|
6426
|
-
AudioDeduplication?: MsSmoothAudioDeduplication;
|
|
6426
|
+
AudioDeduplication?: MsSmoothAudioDeduplication | undefined;
|
|
6427
6427
|
/**
|
|
6428
6428
|
* Use Destination to specify the S3 output location and the output filename base. Destination accepts format identifiers. If you do not specify the base filename in the URI, the service will use the filename of the input file. If your job has multiple inputs, the service uses the filename of the first input file.
|
|
6429
6429
|
* @public
|
|
6430
6430
|
*/
|
|
6431
|
-
Destination?: string;
|
|
6431
|
+
Destination?: string | undefined;
|
|
6432
6432
|
/**
|
|
6433
6433
|
* Settings associated with the destination. Will vary based on the type of destination
|
|
6434
6434
|
* @public
|
|
6435
6435
|
*/
|
|
6436
|
-
DestinationSettings?: DestinationSettings;
|
|
6436
|
+
DestinationSettings?: DestinationSettings | undefined;
|
|
6437
6437
|
/**
|
|
6438
6438
|
* If you are using DRM, set DRM System to specify the value SpekeKeyProvider.
|
|
6439
6439
|
* @public
|
|
6440
6440
|
*/
|
|
6441
|
-
Encryption?: MsSmoothEncryptionSettings;
|
|
6441
|
+
Encryption?: MsSmoothEncryptionSettings | undefined;
|
|
6442
6442
|
/**
|
|
6443
6443
|
* Specify how you want MediaConvert to determine the fragment length. Choose Exact to have the encoder use the exact length that you specify with the setting Fragment length. This might result in extra I-frames. Choose Multiple of GOP to have the encoder round up the segment lengths to match the next GOP boundary.
|
|
6444
6444
|
* @public
|
|
6445
6445
|
*/
|
|
6446
|
-
FragmentLength?: number;
|
|
6446
|
+
FragmentLength?: number | undefined;
|
|
6447
6447
|
/**
|
|
6448
6448
|
* Specify how you want MediaConvert to determine the fragment length. Choose Exact to have the encoder use the exact length that you specify with the setting Fragment length. This might result in extra I-frames. Choose Multiple of GOP to have the encoder round up the segment lengths to match the next GOP boundary.
|
|
6449
6449
|
* @public
|
|
6450
6450
|
*/
|
|
6451
|
-
FragmentLengthControl?: MsSmoothFragmentLengthControl;
|
|
6451
|
+
FragmentLengthControl?: MsSmoothFragmentLengthControl | undefined;
|
|
6452
6452
|
/**
|
|
6453
6453
|
* Use Manifest encoding to specify the encoding format for the server and client manifest. Valid options are utf8 and utf16.
|
|
6454
6454
|
* @public
|
|
6455
6455
|
*/
|
|
6456
|
-
ManifestEncoding?: MsSmoothManifestEncoding;
|
|
6456
|
+
ManifestEncoding?: MsSmoothManifestEncoding | undefined;
|
|
6457
6457
|
}
|
|
6458
6458
|
/**
|
|
6459
6459
|
* @public
|